# E XHIBIT 

# 1

### 1M23N27902 

# 14 CHANNEL COMPUTER SYSTEM

TM

TM

# 14 CHANNEL COMPUTER SYSTEM

TM

TM



## Technical updates and additional programming examples available at: http://www.futaba-rc.com/faq Entire Contents © 2012

# 2 <Table of Contents> INTRODUCTION............................................... 4	
	

 ......................................... 4
		
	
 ........... 5
		 ...................................... 6

	

			


	!"



#$ ............................................................. 6

%&'(	) ................................................... 10
&


		*+,	 ............................................ 102
	
	
"
	

 ........... 11


 ....................................................... 12
7

	 ....................................... 13

2
		"
#	


 ...................... 14 9	 ................................................... 14 !"	;=$ ............................................... 15 #
		7*;7+$ ....................................... 15 ?
	9	($ ............................................ 15 
	9

	9	($ ....................................... 15 ='@AB7	)EF)@'FE	% ........ 15 Touch sensor ................................................... 16 G	
H
 ............................................. 17 	
 ............................................................ 19 2
@# ............................................... 21 B

	
	

		"
	

 ........ 22
(


	


 ................................... 24
(


L	


	

 ...................... 26

	

	!"
	
#		
 ... 27
E%)@E%)M	B

 ............................ 28E%)	Q#	


 ................................... 29E%)M	
 ................................................ 30E%)@E%)M	


# ......................... 317


	
 ............................................ 32

%B2	'(7B'F ....................................... 33%

	2"
## ............................................ 33

=!		"
#
	"
	F=	%

 ................. 33 =!			'F@'&&	"
	

 .......... 34 Q"
	#	 ............................................ 34 Q"
	#	 ............................................ 34 9!	

	

	
	
	";! ...... 34 Q
#	
	
	!
	 ........................ 34(
#
		"
	
L	

 ..................... 34
=
	

 .................................................... 35

)
	
 ....................................................... 369G	

	7*+,@(SVVW%$ ............... 37(
#
	
#		(@2	
...................... 39

(2B?(	F	(?'	BF7997B'F . 40
(


	
	
	
 ..................... 40
	
		
	
 .................... 41

'9	%B2	77BF,	('2)( ... 44

@#
	
	
#	

 ........ 44=

	
	
#	

 ................ 46

&)F27B'F	'&	X7	F) ................ 50

7

 ............................................................. 51 
 ............................................................. 54 User Name ....................................................... 55  ............................................................... 56 =@Q	
# ..................................................... 57 
	9E ....................................................... 59 	9G	 ....................................................... 62 B
	 .................................................... 63 %)	
	 .................................................... 64

&)F27B'F	'&	9BFY,	F) ............. 67 2	&$

9G
#
	
		

 ...................... 67 
	 ................................................. 68 
	

 .................................................... 69 
	7
...................................................... 71 

# 7%9	'&	2'F7F7

# 3 <Table of Contents> 
 ............................................................. 73 & .......................................................... 76 ;7 ......................................................... 78 
	(


 ................................................. 79 &
	

 ........................................................... 80 	 ........................................................ 81 
	

	 .................................................... 82 7"
	2	@=
	$ .......................... 83 B
	!		$ ...................................... 84 !
"	(#	=
	$ .................................. 85 !
"	=
		

	=;*$ ........................ 86 7*;7+	
# .................................................. 89 Q
# ........................................................... 90 7


......................................................... 91 7


Z(;
 .......................................... 92 7


Z; ......................................... 93 7


Z
............................................... 94 7


Z ................................................ 95 7


Z

 .......................................... 96 7


Z
 .............................................. 97 7


Z

 ........................................... 98 7


Z

 ......................................... 99 7


Z

 ............................................ 101 
 ............................................................ 102 
Z

 ................................................ 103 
Z
#
 .............................................. 103 
Z


 ............................................. 104 
Z
	 ............................................... 104 Data Reset ..................................................... 105

&)F27B'F	'&	'9	F) ............... 106
2	& ...................................... 106


		9G
#
	
$ 2	

	,@=
	$ ................ 107 Dual Rate ...................................................... 109 #
	 ..................................................111 &
		@=
	$ .............................. 113

@,
	& ........................... 115


	
		 ........................... 115 "	2
	@,$ ................................. 117 7=(	2
		$ .................................. 118 7=(	

		$ ................................... 119 B9	


	
	*;B9$ ................. 120 &
	
#	M;&9	
	$ ........................ 121 B9		2

	&9	M;B9[M;&9	
	$*MM B9		%
G
	&9	,		+;&9$ ........ 123 B9		() ................................................... 124 ()		B9 ................................................... 125 2

		
	*;B9$ ....................... 127 9		2

	
	*;B9$ .................. 129 2

	&9		9	M;B9[*;&9	
	$ 130 %
\	,		
	!#	M;B9

	\#	!#	M;B9[*&9	
	$ ...... 131 7		,		M;B9	
	$ ........... 133 
G
			M;B9	
	$ ............. 135 ,				,X	
	#$ ............ 137 ?;
 .............................................................. 139 

 ........................................................ 140 Q#
	&#	!#	$ .......................... 141  ............................................................. 142 ()		9		$ ................................ 144 
	(		$ ..................................... 145=

	& .................................... 147


	
		 ........................... 147 B7	2
@	 ....................................... 148 7=(	2
@7"
	"
	@7"


 ......................................................... 151 7=(	= ...................................................... 154 !
"	 ..................................................... 155 7=(	 ....................................................... 156 B7		()	(
	$ ..................... 157 ,		,X	
	#$ .............................. 158 ,
 ....................................................... 161

FBA ...................................................... 164

7
	7*@7M ............................................. 164 !"	
#	
" ................................. 166

# 4 <Introduction> 

## INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing a Futaba ® 

## FASSTest-2.4GHz * 

## 14SG series digital proportional R/C system. This system is extremely versatile and may be used by beginners and pros alike. In order for you to make the	




	





	
	



	





!"#
	$



%& *FASSTest: Futaba Advanced Spread Spectrum Technology extend system telemetry


## '	
	



( change without notice.
%
%)
 

 



 hobby’s “off season” to ensure safe operation.

IN NORTH AMERICA
+
		


%&	




+


,0%3 
! "   
 	

56 67
 8

 
	
	
,0%3
 system and is updated regularly. Any technical updates and US manual corrections will be available on this
	



	"

	 information on contacting us via email for the most rapid and convenient response.
'9

;








<
	
		





			





	

! 

	

		
9
=
 are available Monday through Friday 8-5 Central time to assist you.

FOR SERVICE ONLY:

Futaba Service Center @BBDE'%, &

JK,LDD Phone: 217-398-0007 www.futaba-rc.com/service.html

Email: service@futaba-rc.com FOR SUPPORT : (PROGRAMMING AND USER QUESTIONS)

+

	
)	

56	
6 Fax: 217-398-7721 Phone: 217-398-8970 option 2

OUTSIDE NORTH AMERICA
+





	



 or service needs.+
Y

	










 sold in North America only. Products purchased elsewhere may vary. Always contact your region’s support center for assistance.

# 5 <Introduction> 

## 
		
	

,7

	

	
#

$	 in any application other than the control of models for hobby and recreational purposes. The product is(
	[
	\
67

]


 such purposes.
2. Exportation precautions:#
$<8	
	
	


 
	


		58

(8+

	



	


	
8



Y





 immediately to determine if such export regulations have been met.
#$^	


_8
7
&\



	8

7Y
 


@ [	
 
( 
 
 	 
) 

    	 
Y 	
 
( 
 
 	 
   
  
 

   warranty.
Compliance Information Statement (for U.S.A.)7



&
	
\`BBL%j
,q	&&\=
(	) #,$7



		
 #D$7
 
		 



 operation. The responsible party of this device compliance is: Futaba Service Center @BBDE'%,&

JK,LDD^%7_J#D,`$@{L5L{`B_5
)|	

5#%$7_J#D,`$@{L5BBB`_5
)|	

5#%$
7\j\&%_J!5







 Futaba Corporation of America is voluntarily participating in an industry-wide program to collect


		
!	 ^%
7\j\&
 


!5








. #	^%$ You may contact your local recycling center for information on where to return the spent battery. Please
 ,5LBB5Lj77_\~ 	 	
  E& 

 
  
 

 

 &
 	 America's involvement in this program is part of its commitment to protecting our environment and conserving natural resources.

\j\&


!	\

j

\
&


# 6 <Introduction> 

## Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement (for U.S.A.)
7

	
	
&
j

 to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. 7





	


	

 




		

   

 
 	     
 

 

 	    
 
		
 
 		

			
)
--Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.55



 --Consult the dealer or your Futaba Serivce center for help.

CAUTION: To assure continued FCC compliance:


8


	 


Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation 7
&&\ 8

 


	
 
DB maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons.75

(






Meaning of Special Markings Pay special attention to safety where indicated by the following marks: DANGER 5+






6(
	 carried out properly. WARNING 5+






(
	



	
(
 physical damage is high. CAUTION 5+
	(


 
	(




	

 = Prohibited = Mandatory
Warning : Always keep electrical components away from small children.

FLYING SAFETY WARNING7
	
	
	

	
)

Have regular maintenance performed. Although your 14SG protects the model memories with5
__+\=[
#
$



 transmitter still should have regular checkups for wear and tear. We recommend sending your system

%& 



5
5
  
  ! 
 service.

# 7 <Introduction> 

## NiMH/NiCd Battery Charge the batteries! #%&
 E&
	
$

 


	






	


<



7,0%395
 during the session pay attention to the duration of usage.

	\#	#	

		


	

	!		"
#
E			
			
	! 

	!
#	
	

		
	
	

		
		!"
		
"
#
E	!
 "
G		

	
	


	


			

"	\#"E
Where to Fly
We recommend that you fly at a recognized model airplane flying field. You can find model clubs 	  
! 
 
  
    ^%  
 

 	 [ Aeronautics.
~






	[
#[$

DqBB


7

	


 newcomer training are available. Contact the AMA at the address or toll-free phone number below.
Academy of Model Aeronautics q,K,_
[
' [E0`@BD 7#LBB$0@q5{DKD 
8#`Kq$DL{50D0L or via the Internet at http:\\www.modelaircraft.org

!
	
	

	

		"
	\#	
	
 as well as the presence and location	




j

	





	




	 vicinity.

# 8 <Introduction> 

## NiMH/NiCd Battery Safety and Handling instructions IMPORTANT! Use only the Futaba special charger included with this set or other chargers approved by Futaba to charge the NiMH batteries in the T14SG transmitter included with this set. It is important to understand the operating characteristics of NiMH/NiCd batteries.Always read the

	
E[6E&




	  
 
 !
    
 

   
 
  surroundings and possibly result in a FIRE!

IMPORTANT PRECAUTIONS Do not attempt to disassemble NiMH/NiCd packs or cells. Do not allow NiMH/NiCd cells to come in contact with moisture or water at any time.





E[6E&


 

 Do not leave a NiMH/NiCd battery unattended at any time while being charged or discharged.'

E[6E&



E=7	E[6E&











E[6E&

	
'

E[6E&


!





\6&	5Y
[



!

'  
 E[6E& 
 
  
 
  ,& 
 	  

 #&




	

$ Do not allow NiMH/NiCd cells to overheat at any time! Cells which reach greater than 140 degrees
#KB&$

	
 NiMH/NiCd cells will not charge fully when too cold or show full charge.
	


	


 excessively hot disconnect the battery from the charger immediately!! Always inspect a battery which


	



5	



 in any way. Do not use a NiMH/NiCd battery if you suspect physical damage has occurred to the pack. Carefully

	
	
!

'=E=7


9


!




	


	


 
5	
	

@B'




 Do not discharge NiMH/NiCd batteries at currents which exceed the discharge current rating of the battery. Always store NiMH/NiCd cells/packs in a secure location away from children.

Never remove the SD card or turn off power while entering data. Never store the SD card where it may be(


  '8%'
 excessive humidity or corrosive environments. '  8  %' 
    
	

! Always hold the SD card by the edges during installation and removal. j
%'
 direction. Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Handling Instructions 	
			
	!"	"	
$

# 9 <Introduction> 

## 	"
	\#	

7





		 )
,+!

6 2. Turn on the transmitter power and allow your transmitter to reach its home screen.@&

 4. Turn on your receiver power.q7
	




9



	 the problem.  7

%
	

	
(7
		
	
67

! K%

 7. Complete a full range check.L	

!


!
 your motor/engine. 9. Turn off receiver power. 10. Turn off transmitter power.
	 
     
 
    
 

 

 
    	
  
     
 	 5  
5    

 8



(


Q"
		

	#
#	

		\			

		

		"
	#	
	
	"
	" !	!L			
E	B			GG
	
 !





 





 In order to maintain complete control of your aircraft it is important that it remains visible at all times 

(

'

 	

	
	
! 		#
	"
	

L	


	#	\#"E '




	 	

 

	



	

	 	




 

	
 








 	 	 	 "
	 
 Water or moisture may enter the transmitter through the antenna or stick openings and cause erratic operation or loss of control. If you must fly in wet weather during a     
 
  
 
 
  
	 
 E 	
 	 lightning is expected.

# 10 <Before Use> 

# BEFORE USE

Features

FASSTest system

The T14SG transmitter has adopted the newly developed bidirectional communication system "FASSTest"

. Data from the receiver can be checked in your transmitter. FASSTest is a maximum 14 channels (linear 12 channels + switch 2 channels) 2.4GHz dedicated system. S.BUS2 system By using the S.BUS2 system multiple servos, gyros and telemetry sensors are easily installed with a minimum amount of cables. Model types Six swash types are available for helicopters. Six types of main wings and three types of tail wings are available for airplanes and gliders. Functions and mixing functions necessary for each model type are set in advance at the factory.

Data input

Large graphic LCD and new type Touch Sensor substantially improve ease of setup.

Stick

Improved feel, adjustable length and tension.

Ni-MH battery T14SG is operated by a 6.0 V/1,800 mAh Nickel-Metal Hydride battery.

SD card (Secure Digital memory card) (Not included)

Model data can be saved to an SD card (SD:32MB-2GB SDHC:4GB-32GB). When T14SG transmitter	


	



%'



Edit button Two edit buttons are provided, and the operating screen can be immediately “Returned” to the HOME screen during operation. Setting operation can be performed easily by combining this button with a touch

sensor.

Vibration function Selects a function that alerts the operator to various alarms and timers by vibrating the transmitter in addition to sounding a buzzer.

# 11 <Before Use> 

# 2
	
	7
"
	

 #%



(
$ 

### Your 14SG includes the following components:

7,0%3
	

 \`BBL%j\7q,LBBjE[

&
J5
	
7DD,BBj67D,`BBjJ


! %
 E!
 *The set contents depend on the type of set.



## Transmitter T14SG (2-stick, 14-channel, FASSTest-2.4G system) Transmitting frequency: 2.4GHz band%
)%%7,0&%%7,D&%%7[^J7%%7`&%5%%
+
)KB7q,LBBjE[




## Receiver R7008SB (FASSTest-2.4G system, dual antenna diversity, S.BUS system)+)@``0


	_%&#,$ %Y)B{L8,LK8BqK#D0{80`@8,0@$ Weight: 0.38 oz. (10.9g) (*1) When using ESC's make sure that the regulated output capacity meets your usage application.



## Note: The battery in the T14SG transmitter is not connected to the battery connector at initial. Please connect the battery connector before use.

# 12 <Before Use>7q,LBBj7



!5#,LBB$
E[


!





8

	


	8
7DD,BBj67D,`BBj7
J


!


8

spacer. However, charge with the charger only for LiFe.7
5










by placing the instructor on a separate transmitter. Note that the T14SG transmitter may be connected to another T14SG system, as well as to any other models of Futaba transmitters. The T14SG transmitter uses one of the three cord plug types according to the transmitter connected. (Refer to the description at the TRAINER function instructions). The part number of this cord is: ^7[00Bq

%5

!	+
		




the model and the purpose of using you. If you utilize a S.BUS system, you should choose a S.BUS servo. An analog servo cannot be used if "FASSTest12CH mode" is used.7
  5 
 
 
 
     Y 


communication system and to acquire the information from a model high up in the sky. [ Temperature sensor : SBS-01T] [Altitude sensor : SBS-01A] [RPM sensor magnet type : SBS01RM][RPM sensor optical type : SBS-01RO] [GPS sensor : SBS-01G] [Voltage sensor : SBS01V]E!
5
!



7,0%3

!








9
9~5
853

8
~5


a heavy-duty version with heavier wire, are available to aid in your larger model and other installations.3
5


	





	


	 35	



(





head speed regardless of blade pitch, load, weather, etc.\5
	




	

(Receivers for FASSTest and FASST,S-FHSS types are available.)=
&
5

&\5DBBBE[6E&7
6\j

&
 The following additional accessories are available from your dealer. Refer to a Futaba catalog for more information:

# 13 <Before Use> ● Antenna ● Monitor LED

●LCD ●Battery Cover ● Neck Strap Attachment ● Switch (SC,SD,SG,SH) ● Switch (SA,SB,SE,SF)

● Slide Lever (LS) ● Slide Lever (RS)

● Digital Trim (T3,T4)

● Power Switch ● Volume (LD,RD)

● Stick ● Stick

● Digital Trim (T1,T2) ● U.MENU/MON. (User Menu/ Servo Monitor)

Button ● HOME/EXIT Button

*It slides upwards and turns on. 

### ● SensorTouch TM 

### (SYS,LNK, MDL,RTN,S1) (J1) (J2)
(J4) (J3) 

# Transmitter controls

# 14 <Before Use> Transmitter's Antenna:

As with all radio frequency transmissions, the strongest area of signal transmission is from the sides of the transmitter's antenna. As such, the antenna should not be pointed directly at the 	




 easily move the antenna to correct this situation.

LED (Left) Displays the "non-default condition" warning.  

   
  
  

 
 

## LED (Right)

Displays the state of radio frequency transmission.  



  

 
	!
  	

!
 

## Monitor LED display The status of the transmitter is displayed by LED at the bottom left and right sides of the "T14SG" logo.  Rotating antenna The antenna can be rotated 90 degrees and angled 90 degrees. Forcing the antenna further than this can damage it. The antenna is not removable. 

# Caution
Please do not grasp the transmitter's 

	#	\#"E Doing so may degrade the quality of the RF transmission to the model



## Do not carry the transmitter by the antenna. There is the danger that the antenna wire will break and operation will become impossible. 

## Do not pull the antenna forcefully. There is the danger that the antenna wire will break and operation will become impossible.



## Low power

High power High power

It is not good for there to be a model on flight in the direction tip of an antenna. If you have a transmitter at an angle of a figure, an antenna will be good to use it, bending 90 degrees. 

# 90° 90°

# 15 <Before Use> Switch (SA-SH) "#$


"% &'$(%

("

" &'$(%

()	

"* &'$(%

()	

"+ &'$(%

("

", &'$(%

("

" &-$(%

()	

". &'$(%

("

"/ &-$(0!
()	


~

=E6=5 the setting screen of the mixing functions. 

## Slide Lever

**RS LS** 



## LS (Left), RS (right): The slide lever LS and RS offer analog input. *The T14SG transmitter beeps when the lever comes to the center. ~ 
  
   
    direction on the setting screen of mixing functions.



## HOME/EXIT and U.MENU/MON. Button

Volume

**LD RD** 



## Volume LD and RD: The volume LD and RD knobs allow for analog input.

*The T14SG transmitter beeps when the volume knob reaches the center position. ~

	8	


	
 

## Digital Trim

**T1 T2**  **T3 T4**  

## Digital Trim T1, T2, T3 and T4: This transmitter is equipped with four (4) digital trims. Each time you press a trim button, the trim position moves one step. If you continue pressing it, the trim position starts to move faster. In addition, when the trim position returns to 
~



 monitor trim positions by referencing the LCD

screen.

~




 on the home screen on the T1-T4 setting screen within the linkage menu. Note: The trim positions you have set will be stored in the

non-volatile memory and will remain there. 

### HOME/EXIT **Button U.MENU/MON.**  **Button**

RETURN



### Press Return to the previous screen Press and hold Return to the Home screen It pushes from HOME screen. To TELEMETRY display
Push and hold for one (1) second from HOME screen. Key lock On or Off

Press To SERVO MONITOR display Press and hold To User Menu display 

## HOME/EXIT:

U.MENU/MON.:

# 16 <Before Use> **SensorTouchTM operation Condition Working** s3HORTgTAPg
**S1** If the screen has more than one page. (Ex. P-MIX screen) The cursor moves to the top of next page. If the screen have only one (1) page. The cursor moves to the top of page. If inputting data while the cursor is blinking. The input data is canceled.

**RTN** At the moving cursor mode. Change to the input data mode. While in the data input mode. Changes to the moving cursor mode. While inputting data while cursor is blinking. The data is entered. s4WOSHORTgTAPSg **SYS** At all screens Jump to **System Menu** screen directly.

**LNK** At all screens Jump to **Linkage Menu** screen directly.

**MDL** At all screens Jump to **Model Menu** screen directly.

s4OUCHANDHOLDFOR **one (1) second. S1**  At the HOME screen Key lock On or Off

**RTN** While inputting data with no blinking cursor. Reset to the initialized value.

s3CROLLING

**Outline** OF **“RTN”** Lightly circling the outside edge of the RTN button. The cursor moves accordingly.

During the data input mode. Increases or decreases values accordingly. 

## Touch sensor operation

Data input operation is performed using the touch sensor.

Movement of cursor, value input or mode selection :

Movement of the cursor on the menu screen and movement of the cursor among items on a setup screen can be controlled by scrolling your 	
	


~
 also go to the next page, if there is a next page.

This scrolling technique is also used for data input, value input, mode selection, and similar operations. Examples include: Value, ON, OFF, INH, ACT, etc.
RTN button: Touch the RTN button when you want to open a setup screen or to switch between cursor move mode (reverse display) and data input mode (box display).

This button can also be used as the enter button 




 screen, etc. S1 button: When there is a next page on a menu screen or setup screen, you can go to that page by touching the S1 button. In this case, the cursor moves to the screen title item of the page. Exiting setup screen: To end the operation on a setup screen and return to the menu screen, move the cursor to the screen title item and touch the RTN button.

To return to home screen directly, touch the S1 button for 1 second. Alternatively, move the cursor to the screen title item and touch the RTN button to return to the home screen from a menu screen.

# 17 <Before Use> Note:

%
)&
	 the RTN button. The sensors may mis-read your touch as a reverse rotation if the circle is smaller, or performed on the inside edge of the RTN button.

* The SensorTouchTM may not operate smoothly if your hand is touching the surrounding case parts. Please make sure that the tip of your finger is actually operating the SensorTouchTM.

*If the SensorTouchTM does not register your input, please try again after lightly tapping your finger on the sensor once again. * Do not operate the SensorTouchTM while wearing gloves. The SensorTouchTM may not work correctly.



# Caution
The touch sensor may not operate correctly if spark noise is generated from a gasoline engine, etc. Please remove the transmitter to a location away from the noise source.

Stick Adjustment Adjustment of the stick lever length

~

(	!
 you like. It is recommended to adjust the length of the sticks in line with your hand size. 1/



22


 
2%2
3
#
 


 -#


3
2%2
 


3
22
$	 


A Lever Head B Lever Head 

## Adjustment of stick lever tension The tension of the self-return type stick lever can be adjusted. 14 
!
 
 
 
  


!
!

54$	
 


!

 
! 
!
 -
54	4
!

!
6



 
7
	0
14 


!



 5$





'8	
!

!
 
 
	$ s3IDE#OVER s)TISONLYTHEMODE

s2EAR'RIP 

### It removes from here * It is difficult to remove rear grips from the central site of a transmitter. Therefore, remove from the outside of rear grips.

s2EAR'RIP

# 18 <Before Use> 9%

:!
4
3

 

	$ ;8
!
$

:


$	
	$

 	
 :	

 : *Turning the screw clockwise increases the tension. 

###  *%8#<& <  
 
 
  !4



$
 



#  
            
 :
   =
 


+ screw is clockwise.

Stick tension maximum Stick tension minimum + screw is counter-clockwise.

A screw is kept from coming out from a line.


## *The screw will touch the case. s3TICK4ENSION* (Mode 1/2) s3TICK4ENSION* (Mode 2) s3TICK4ENSION* (Mode 1/2)

s3TICK4ENSION* (Mode 1)

# 19 <Before Use> SD Card (Secure Digital memory card) (Not included) The T14SG transmitter model data can be stored by using any commonly found SD card. When T14SG transmitter update software is released, the software is updated using an SD card. The T14SG is capable of using SD cards with a memory size SD : 32MB-2GB SDHC : 4GB-32GB. Inserting/removing the SD card 1#
!
$



$

 


 ! 
!


-#
"+


>	
  

# Caution
Be sure to turn off the power to the transmitter before inserting or removing the SD card.
As the SD card is a precision device, do not use excessive force when inserting.

Restrictions when using an SD card The following restrictions apply when using an SD card:

*The SD card must first be initialized using the T14SG dedicated format. The SD card cannot be used as is without formatting to the T14SG. *Initializing destroys all the data previously saved on the card. *An SD card formatted to the T14SG cannot be written
	
+&<_87 must be converted and written by the Futaba File System	


	
 This special conversion software can be downloaded from Futaba's web site at: http://www.futaba-rc.com/software-updates.html 

### 1 Push to open. 2Slide in the direction of the arrow on the battery cover.

3 Battery cover will open downward. ery cover will open do wn wa rd



### SD card slot

# 20 <Before Use> [Inserting the card]  #
"+

 



!
 


 +



 

## [Removing the card]  7

"+$


	4 
 



!
  

!
 '*

 





## SD card initialization

To use an SD card with the T14SG, the card	
=	

 does not have to be reformatted. Formatting is performed by the T14SG.  ?<0
#%#@7
"+!
  
 #1;".4  $
3
5	   

 Do not format a card containing important data.



## [Formatting procedure] 1<

"+
"+


#1;". -#  
 #1;". $
 7
  !



#1;".4 


 
$$


'<
#1;".
!4!

   ?0%#@   
 # #
!	4!

   ?*%*,)@   
 # 

;0

?A,"@
#  * Formatting starts. During formatting, the [NOW FORMATTING...] message is displayed.

*When formatting is completed, The [FORMAT COMPLETED] message is displayed. Depending on the card capacity and speed, formatting may take as long as several minutes. 

## [IMPORTANT] Do not turn off the power until the [FORMAT COMPLETED] message is displayed.

9,!	 	
# 



## SD card reader/writer Saving model data and update files (released from Futaba) to the SD card from your own PC, you can transfer those file to your T14SG transmitter. Equipment for reading and writing SD cards is available at most electronics stores.

Stored data

If you have a problem saving or reading data after a long period of use, we suggest obtaining a %'

		

*Futaba is not responsible for compensating any failure or damage to the data stored in the memory card. As such, we suggest that you maintain a backup of your important data contained on your SD card.

# 21 <Before Use> Connector/Plug

Connector for trainer function

When you use the trainer function, connect the optional trainer cable between the transmitters for teacher and student.

~

	7


screen in the System menu.


## S.BUS connector (S.I/F)

When setting an S.BUS servo and telemetry sensor, connect them both here.

#%
@5

~5
$
Earphone plug

It is not used now. (The function after upgrade) 

# Warning
Do not connect any other chargers except the special charger to this charging connector.	

!E[

7q,LBBj	transmitter, you can use the optional quick charger CR2000 corresponding to NiMH battery. 

### Trainer **Connector**

**S.BUS (S.I/F) Connector** 

**Earphone Plug** 



## Connector for battery charger This is the connector for charging the NiMH

 7q,LBBj 
  
   transmitter. Do not use any other chargers except the attached special charger corresponding to NiMH battery. **Charge**

**Plug**

# 22 <Before Use> Installation and Removal of the HT5F1800B Transmitter Battery Attachment of the battery 1"

 


 !


!

	
 $


-<
 


 '*

 



;*

 

!$

 

## Battery Removal Note: If you remove the battery while the power is on, the data you have set will not be saved. 1$

 

 -+

 

 '


 



 $


 

!
 ;*

 

!$





# Warning
Be careful not to drop the battery.

Never disconnect the battery connector from the T14SG transmitter after turning off the power until the screen is completely blank and the transmitter has shut down completely.
* Internal devices such as memories may be damaged. * If there is any problem, the message "Backup Error" will be shown the next time when you turn on the power of the transmitter. Do not use the transmitter as it is. Send it to the Futaba Service Center. 1 Push to open. 2Slide in the direction of the arrow on the battery cover.

3 Battery cover will open downward. ery co ver wi ll ope n d own war d



### Battery Battery release tab Connector

# 23 <Before Use> When exchanging for the LiFe battery (FT2F2100B/FT2F1700B) of an option. Attachment of the battery 1#1;"./#91BCC
!
 -  % )
 $
 1;". !
  

>	


'%)
 
$



>	


;-
 
   )
 
  



9*

 

!$

 6 . T 1 4 S G i s t u r n e d o n a n d [ L I N K A G E

MENU]=>[WARNING]=>[LOW BATTERY] is called. 7. It changes into 6.0V from 5.6V. 

## Charge of a LiFe battery Note: LiFe battery cannot be charged with the charger of 14SG attachment. Be sure to remove a battery from T14SG and to charge from the charger only for LiFe.



# Warning
Follow the manual of a LiFe battery.

Don't charge the LiFe battery with the NiMH charger of 14SG attachment.
* Be sure to remove from T14SG and to charge with the charger only for LiFe.



## Be sure to change the voltage of LOW BATTERY WARNING into 6.0V from 5.6V      $        LiFe SPACER

LiFe Battery

The balance charge connector is not connected in the state where the battery is set to a transmitter. 

### A LiFe battery is removed from T14SG.

Balance charge is carried out from the charger only for LiFe. 2P connector is removed from T14SG. 

## The battery state inside T14SG

NiMH HT5F1800B

LiFe FT2F2100B/1700B LiFe SPACER



### *About low battery voltage, all the models included in one transmitter are changed in common. It cannot set to different voltage for every model. Moreover, data reset is not carried out.

# 24 <Before Use> Link/Mode Switch Use the small plastic screw driver that was included with your receiver.

The Link/Mode Switch is also used for the CH mode selection.

Extra Voltage Connector

Use this connector when using a voltage telemetry device to send the battery voltage (DC0 `B$	


~

_8


#&5\E5`BB$^7[qqq,

~ 
  
! 
 
  
 8
 connector to the External voltage connector. 

# Receiver nomenclature

Before using the receiver, be sure to read the precautions listed in the following pages.
Receiver R7008SB

Connector "1 through 6": outputs for the channels 1 through 6 £`6j£)	`

 "8/SB": outputs of 8 channels or S.BUS port. [S.BUS Servo S.BUS Gyro ] *When using 8/SB as S.BUS, you have to set CH MODE of the following page to mode B or mode D. "S.BUS2": outputs of S.BUS2 port. [S.BUS2 Servo S.BUS2 Gyro Telemetry Sensor ]

*When using 9 or more channels, use an S.BUS
\`BBL%j
! to your transmitter.

Connector insertion

Firmly insert the connector in the direction%j^%D it 90 degrees. 

# +

-

Do not connect either a switch or battery in this manner. 5HFHLYHU 

# Danger Danger Don't connect a connector, as shown in a 

	#
E
*It will short-circuit, if it connected in this way. A short circuit across the battery terminals may cause abnormal

 

# Warning S.BUS2 connectors Don't connect an S.BUS servo / gyro to S.BUS2 connector.

LED Monitor This monitor is used to check the CH mode of the receiver.

# 25 <Before Use> R7008SB CH Mode 7 \`BBL%j   
 
 
 unit. It has 8 PWM outputs, S.BUS and S.BUS2 outputs. Additionally the PWM outputs can be changed from channels 1-8 to channels 9-14. If you only desire to use it as an 8 channel receiver (without S.BUS), it can be used without any setting changes.

The T1 4SG has the ability to link to two \`BBL%j=	 channels 1-8 and the other outputting channels 9-14 giving you 14 PWM channels. Instructions for this configuration and S.BUS operation follow. ¤
\`BBL%j&
¥ 1


)D0
 


ECCB"


 -#




	 
 )D0
   
  
 ),+  	

D

 ! 


 '#
),+ 
 	

  
 $
 
 
  
   ; , $
  
 0
D)  






5!
 97


!


$

4$

0
D ) !
-
 F



!

 ),+	
 E







$


	
		
*
 0




## Receiver connector Setting channel Mode A 1 ~ 8CH Mode B 1 ~ 7CH Mode C 9 ~ 14CH Mode D 9 ~ 14CH 1 1199
2 2 2 10 10
3 3 3 11 11
4 4 4 12 12
5 5 5 13 13
6 6 6 14 14 7/B 7 7 - - 8/SB 8 S.BUS - S.BUS

Red LED blink 1time 2time 3time 4time 

# R7008SB CH MODE TABLE Danger
Don't touch wiring. * There is a danger of receiving an electric shock. 

## Do not short-circuit the battery terminals. * A short circuit across the battery terminals may cause


 

## Please double check your polarity ( + and

- ) when hooking up your connectors.

* If + and

- of wiring are mistaken, it will damage, ignite and explode. 

## Don’t connection to Extra Voltage before turning on a receiver power supply.

# 26 <Before Use> 

# Receiver's Antenna Installation

7\`BBL%j



8Y


	

 has adopted a diversity antenna system. This allows the receiver to obtain RF signals on both antennas and
5	

Antenna *Must be kept as straight as possible.

Coaxial cable R7008SB Receiver


## To obtain the best results of the diversity function, please refer to the following instructions: 1#

! 

$	

$ 





 

	
 -#

 
$
GC 
	



  #	
4 
! !$	

$

 !

!$ 
  )	
 !
  
 	
 !
 :



	< 


 
$
  

!
#

 
 	 
H	 
 '#

! 

$! 
 !
4   !
4  
 
 #
5$


 



	

4   
	 ;I

$

!
!4 ,"*4


! $ 


*The two antennas should be placed at 90 degrees to each other. *The Illustration demonstrates how the antenna should be placed. *Receiver Vibration and Waterproofing: The receiver contains precision electronic parts. Be sure to avoid vibration,

shock, and temperature extremes. For protection, wrap the receiver in foam rubber or other vibration-absorbing materials. It is also a good idea to waterproof the receiver by placing it in a plastic bag and securing the open end of the bag with a rubber band before wrapping it with foam rubber. If you accidentally get moisture or fuel inside the receiver, you may experience intermittent operation or a crash. If in doubt, return the receiver to our service center for service. 

## Antenna 

## Antenna

# 27 <Before Use> Rubber grommet Brass eyelet Wood screw

Servo mount 2.3-2.6mm nut washer Rubber grommet Brass eyelet Servo mount

2.3-2.6mm screw

(Helicopter) (Airplane/Glider)



## Servo lead wires

To prevent the servo lead cable from being broken by vibration during flight, provide a little slack in the cable and fasten it at suitable points. Periodically check the cable during daily maintenance.

Fasten about 5-10cm from the servo outlet so that the lead wire is neat. Margin in the lead wire.



## Mounting the power switch

When mounting a power switch to an airframe, make a rectangular hole that is a little larger than the total stroke of the switch so that you can turn the switch ON/OFF without binding.

Avoid mounting the switch where it can be covered by engine oil and dust. In general, it is recommended to mount the power switch on the 		

	 

# Safety precautions when you install receiver and servos
Warning Connecting connectors

Be sure to insert the connector until it stops at the deepest point.
How to protect the receiver from vibration and water
Wrap the receiver with something soft such as foam rubber to avoid vibration. If there is a chance of getting wet, put the receiver in a waterproof bag or balloon to avoid water.

Receiver's antenna

Never cut the receiver's antenna. Do not bind the receiver's antenna with the cables for servos.

Locate the receiver's antenna as far as possible from metals or carbon fiber components such as frames, cables, etc.
*Cutting or binding the receiver's antenna will reduce the radio reception sensitivity and range, and may cause a crash.



## Servo throw
Adjust your system so that pushrods will not bind or sag when operating the servos to the full extent.
*If excessive force is continuously applied to a servo, the

servo could be damaged due to force on the gear train and/or power consumption causing rapid battery drain. 

## Mounting servos
Use a vibration-proof rubber (such as rubber grommet) under a servo when mounting the servo on a servo mount. And be sure that the servo cases do not touch directly to the metal parts such as servo mount. *If the servo case contacts the airframe directly, vibration will travel to and possibly damage the servo. 

## Mounting the Servo

# 28 <Before Use> 

# S.BUS/S.BUS2 Installation

7%j^%6%j^%D
7



 with models that use a large number of servos. In addition, the wings can be quickly installed to the fuselage without any erroneous wiring by the use of only one simple wire, even when there are a large number of servos used.¦<%j^%6%j^%D

8





¦7%j^%6%j^%DY	
#%
7,0%3$¦7%j^%6%j^%D



#
&$
8

Receiver: R7008SB Battery: FR2F1800 ( Optional )
Switch: HSW-L Throttle servo: BLS173SV ( Optional )

Aileron servo: BLS174SV×2 ( Optional )

Elevator servo: BLS173SV×2 ( Optional ) Rudder Servo: BLS175SV×1 ( Optional ) HUB×3 ( Optional ) Receiver: R7008SB Servo: S3172SV×9 ( Optional )

HUB×4 ( Optional ) 

### S.BUS Glider usage example

S.BUS Aerobatic plane usage example

# 29 <Before Use> 

# S.BUS Wiring example

%DWWHU\

%DWWHU\ *< ([WHQVLRQ FRUG 6ZLWFK

6ZLWFK 7HUPLQDOER[

+8%

+8% +8% +8% +8%

+8% +8% ق$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\ك

+8% 6%866HUYR 6%866HUYR Receiver



## ●S.BUS Servo Since the channel number is memorized by the S.BUS itself, any connector can be used. When the SBD-1 (sold separately) is used, ordinary servos can be used with the S.BUS system.

●When separate power supply used When a large number of servos are used or when high current servos are used, the servos can be driven by a separate power supply by using a separate Power Supply 3-way Hub. ● 7HUPLQDOER[
Four connectors can be inserted

Three connectors can be inserted. Used when using a separate power supply battery. 6%86 3RUW 6%

Orange Green 

## *When using 8/SB as S.BUS, you must set the receiver to Mode B or Mode D. See R7008SB CH MODE TABLE.



# Warning Power supply Please make sure that you use a battery that can deliver enough capacity for the number and kind of servos used. Alkaline batteries cannot be used.

# 30 <Before Use> 

# S.BUS2 System

When using the S.BUS2 port, an impressive array of telemetry sensors may be utilized.

Receiver port S.BUS Servo S.BUS Gyro 

## S.BUS2 Servo 

## S.BUS2 Gyro Telemetry sensor
S.BUS ○ ○ ×


# S.BUS2 × (※) ○ ○ 

# S.BUS2 TABLE

(※) Don't connect S.BUS Servo, S.BUS Gyro to S.BUS2 connector.

6%86 3RUW 6%86 3RUW 6%

+XE

+XE +XE +XE

5XGGHU6HUYR 

# 6%86 6HUYR 6%866HUYR
6%86 VHUYR &RQQHFWLRQLVSRVVLEOH
6%86 J\UR &RQQHFWLRQLVSRVVLEOH 6%86VHUYR &RQQHFWLRQLVLPSRVVLEOH

7HOHPHWU\VHQVRU &RQQHFWLRQLVLPSRVVLEOH 

# 6%86 *<52 &+0RGHLVVHWWR0RGH%>'@



## ٔ 

# 7HOHPHWU\ 6HQVRU S.BUS servos and gyros and S.BUS2 servos and gyros must be used in the correct receiver ports. Please refer to the instruction manual to make sure you connect to the correct one.

# 31 <Before Use> 

# S.BUS/S.BUS2 device setting

S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or a telemetry sensor can be connected directly to the T14SG. Channel setting and other data can be entered for the S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or sensors.

'3  A3



6%866%86 6HUYR 6%866%86 GHYLFH

7HOHPHWU\VHQVRU 5HFHLYHUV %DWWHU\ 76*



### 1*

"8"

 
 
'3 A3

 
>	
 -#
!
$
 '*

$



"
&"
!0
 → "8""
 "
&)	
0
 → "
 ;

!
	





 9#






"8"
4

!


 

 
"8"






# 32 <Before Use> 

# Telemetry System

7\`BBL%j	
5


%%7


 the S.BUS2 port. Using the S.BUS2 port an impressive array of telemetry sensors may be utilized. It also includes both standard PWM output ports and S.BUS output ports. * Telemetry is available only in the FASSTest 14CH mode. (12CH mode displays only Receiver battery

voltage and Extra battery voltage.) 7
	#\`BBL%j$77,0%3
!'	\`BBL%j
!



## 6%86 &RQQHFWRU 7HPSHUDWXUH 6HQVRU Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3 ~ 5

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 8 ~ 15

Slot 16 

## Receiver Battery voltage is displayed at the transmitter. Drive battery voltage is displayed at the transmitter.

6ZLWFK 76*

7HUPLQDOER[ +8%

+8%

+8% Info

Info

Info

InfoInfo



## voltageSignal



### 530 6HQVRU

$OWLWXGH 6HQVRU

9ROWDJH 6HQVRU

*36 6HQVRU

Slot 17 

### 6HQVRU 6HQVRU

6HQVRU 

# ●Telemetry sensor (sold separately)
Your aircrafts data can be checked in the transmitter by connecting various telemetry sensors to the S.BUS2 connector of the receiver.

●Slot No.
Servos are classified by channel, but sensors are classified by “slot” . Since the initial slot No. of the T14SG is preset at each sensor, the sensors can be used as is by connecting them. There are 1 ~ 31 slots.Info

# 33 <Basic Operation> 

# BASIC OPERATION

How to charge the NiMH battery HT5F1800B for the transmitter


# Danger
The NiMH battery HT5F1800B is only for your T14SG. Do not use this battery for other equipment.
Be sure to use the attached special charger to charge the battery. *If you take the NiMH battery HT5F1800B out of the transmitter, you can use the optional quick charger CR-2000 corresponding to NiMH battery.



## [Method of charging battery]

*Connect to AC outlet

specified.**Special charger**

Receiver Batt. Charging display

To T14SG charge connector Transmitter Batt. Charging display



### 1. Connect the special charger to the wall

socket (AC outlet). 2. Connect the connectors to the T14SG charging jack. &


J_'
 *Turn off the transmitter while charging the battery. 

### 3. Remove the battery after 15 hours. *Battery charging will not automatically stop. Remove the battery and transmitter from the charger and remove the charger from the wall socket. *It is recommended to reactivate the battery by cycling

several times if the battery has not been used for a long period. *In the case of NiMH/NiCd batteries, you may find poor performance of the battery if you have used the battery only for a short period or if you repeat charging while the battery is not fully discharged. It is suggested to discharge the battery to the recommended level after use. It is also recommended to charge the battery just before use. 

# Battery Charging

Before charging batteries, read the "Cautions for handling battery and battery charger" in the section "NiMH/NiCd Battery Safety and Handling Instructions".

# 34 <Basic Operation> 

# How to turn transmitter power ON/OFF

When turning on the power, the T14SG transmitter will begin emmiting RF automatically \

The T14SG transmitter also offers the ability to auto shut-down. When turning on the power of the transmitter

1. Turn on the power switch of the transmitter.

7
£&_&§\&=E'7=E£

	

	J_'!



### 2. Then, you will see the home screen and the transmitter begins to emit radio waves. 7	
J_'
 

## How to stop the transmitter 1. Turn off the power switch of the transmitter.

*The transmitter shuts down at once.



## Low battery alarm and auto shut-down

When the battery voltage reaches 5.2V, an 

   J
 
 

	 immediately.

When the battery voltage reaches 3.9V, the transmitter will be turned off automatically.

*If you do not operate the transmitter (or move a stick, knob, switch or digital trim) for 30 minutes, the message £+J_%_7^\E=+=<_\%<7&£


 an audible alarm will sound.



## Warning display at power ON (Airplane/ Helicopter)

<!+=
 the high side (or over 1/3 stick) a warning will be displayed. *below 1/3 stick, the warning display goes off.



# Registration of the user's name If so desired, the T14SG transmitter can indicate the owner's name. User's name setup screen 1. Turn on the power of the transmitter.

*The home screen appears. 

### 2. Lightly touch the SYS button twice rapidly and the System menu appears. 3. Select [USER NAME] in the System menu and

touch the RTN button. *The user name set up screen appears.

Input Box

*Current user name is displayed. 

## Changing the user name 1. Change the user name as described below: [Moving cursor in input box]  "

?}@?~@4
#  [Deleting a character] When [DELETE] is selected and the RTN button is touched, the character immediately after the cursor is deleted. [Adding a character] When a character is selected from the character list and the RTN button is touched, that character is added at the position immediately after the cursor. *A name of up to 10 characters long can be entered as the user name. (A space is also counted as one character.) 

### 2. At the end of input, select [ENTER] and tuoch the RTN button. (To terminate input and return to the original state, select [CANCEL] and touch the RTN button.) 

### THR Stick Slow

# 35 <Basic Operation> Up/Down timer (ST1, ST2)#!
$


 Touch the RTN button at the [xx]:[xx.

xx] item to start/stop the timer. 8

		4


touch the RTN button at the ST1 or ST2 item to call the timer set-up screen. *See the description at the back of this manual. 

# Home screen

Digital trim (T1 to T4) #!$$


 A


$

on the home screen on the T1-T4 setting screen within the linkage menu. 

## Model Name#
!
!


is currently used is displayed here. 8
 
  

highlight this, then touch the RTN button to call the model select set-up screen. 

## User's name System timer#
!
!



the latest reset. (Hour):(Minute)8

		4


touch the RTN button for one second to reset the system timer. 

## ^	






\7E button. The setting screen appears.

RF indicator Battery Indicator 7
 
 
 	


reaches 5.2V(Change in Warning Menu), the alarm will beep. Land your aircraft immediately.



## System mode "
!%""#
1;*/ 


mode is displayed here.8

		4

then touch the RTN button to call the frequency set-up
screen.



## 2 nd 

## Home screen#
# 

the clock icon to call the 2 nd 

### home screen (large size timer). 

## Model timer#
!
!


since the latest reset. (each model) (Hour):(Minute) 8
 
   		 4

then touch the RTN button for one second to reset the model timer. 

## Key lock # 
 "1   $ 


HOME/EXIT button for one second to lock/unlock the key operation. In the key lock mode the key icon is displayed here.



## Model type

SD card indicator

Condition name (Heli/Glider)<
!4!



cursor to the condition name and touch the RTN button. The condition name is changed and blinks. It is possible to operate the digital trim in all conditions. 

## VPP condition # (Air)7


	



4



 # is displayed here.

# 36 <Basic Operation> 

# Warning

j
	 



	 Check the battery voltage as often as possible and try to charge the battery earlier. If the battery alarm makes a sound, land your aircraft immediately. 

# User Menu

A user menu which allows the user to customize and display frequently used functions has been added. 1. When the "U.MENU" button is pushed for

two seconds, the user menu appears.\_ ̈7 while the user menu is being displayed.



### 2. When the cursor highlights the dotted line,

"----------" and the RTN button is touched, the menu selection screen appears.

3. When the cursor is moved to the setting

that you to set to the user menu and the RTN button is touched, that setting screen is added to the user menu. 4. The registered setting screen can be called by moving the cursor to it and touching the RTN button.

*When you want to delete an added screen from the user menu, highlight item you wish to delete, press and hold the RTN button for one second.

# 37 <Basic Operation> 

# Link procedure (T14SG/R7008SB) _






'

!'	

=!
 the ID code is stored in the receiver and no further linking is necessary unless the receiver is to be used with another transmitter. When you purchase additional R7008SB receivers, this procedure is necessary; otherwise the receiver will not work.

Link procedure 1


!







to each other within half (0.5m) meter.

2. Turn on the transmitter. 3. Select [SYSTEM] at the Linkage menu and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

4. When you use two receivers on one model,

you must change from [SINGLE] to [DUAL]. *Only two r eceivers can be used. In "DUAL", two setting items come out. Input, respectively.

922 






"G" general. 6. When changing battery fail-safe voltage from the initial value 3.8V, voltage is changed here. %""#
0


7.[LINK] is chosen by scrolling and the RTN

button is pushed. The transmitter will emit a chime as it starts the linking process.

8. When the transmitter starts to chime, power on the receiver. The receiver should link to the transmitter within about 1 second.

9. If linking fails, an error message is displayed. Bring the transmitter closer to the receiver and repeat the procedure above from Step 2.

10. ACT will be chosen if telemetry is used.

It is INH when not using it. 

### Less than 0.5 m

In "Link" Mode

Receiver ON :You can do this through the LINKAGE Menu

and scroll to System and press RTN. d th is th h th LINK

<+   
! receiver displays.

In DUAL, a primary receiver is link previously. Next, a secondary receiver is link. ID of a Secondary receiver displays.

# 38 <Basic Operation> 11. When a telemetry function is enabled,

the receiving interval (down-link interval) of sensor data can be changed. If a DL interval is increased, the response of the sensor data display becomes slower, but stick response will improve. Initial value: 1.0s Adjustment range: 0.1s~2.0s

* If there are many FASSTest systems turned on around your receiver, it might not link to your transmitter. In this case, 	J_'

	

 the receiver might have established a link to one of other transmitters. This is very dangerous if you do not notice this situation. In order to avoid the problem, we strongly recommend you to doublecheck whether your receiver is really under control by your transmitter by giving the stick input and then checking the servo response. *Do not perform the linking operation when the drive motor is connected or the engine is running. * When you use two receivers, please be sure to setup a

"primary" and "secondary" in the "dual" mode. *Since two sets of receivers cannot be individually recognized without using a "primary" and "secondary" setup, it is impossible to receive telemetry data correctly. * You must link one receiver at a time. If both power

supplies to the receivers are switched on simultaneously, data is received incorrectly by the transmitter. * If a dual receiver function is used, in order to receive

sensor information correctly by both sets, telemetry data will be slower compared to a single receiver setup. * You cannot link three receivers. J!



 J!

 J!







# Warning
After the linking is done, please cycle receiver power and check that the receiver to be linked is really under the control of the transmitter. Do not perform the linking procedure with motor's main wire connected or with the engine operating as it may result in serious injury.

# 39 <Basic Operation> 

# Range Testing Your R/C System

It is extremely important to range check your models prior to each flying session. This enables you to

	



8(
	

 The T14SG transmitter incorporates a system that reduces its power output and allows you to perform such a range check.

Range check mode

We have installed a special "Range check mode" for doing a ground range check. To access the "Range check mode" touch and hold the RTN button while turning on the transmitter. Doing so+=<_\[='_

To activate the "Range check mode" touch the RTN button and the range check mode screen will appear.

During this mode, the RF power output is reduced so the range test can be performed. In addition, when this mode is activated the rightJ_'		

! and the transmitter gives users a warning with a beeping sound every 3 seconds. The "Range check mode" continues for 90 seconds and after that the power will return to the normal level. To exit the "Range check£	{B£\E3_ &_&§£
	
 RTN button again. This mode is available one time only so if you need to re-use this function the

E__\
 
£\
!£
 Should you require additional time to perform a range check, highlight Restart before your time expires and press the RTN button one time. Range check procedure 1. With the "Range check mode" on, walk

away from the model while simultaneously operating the controls. Have an assistant stand by the model to confirm that all controls are completely and correctly operational. You should be able to walk approximately 30-50 paces from the model without losing control. 2. If everything operates correctly, return to the model. Set the transmitter in a safe, yet accessible, location so it will be within reach after starting the engine or motor. Be certain the throttle stick is in the low throttle position, 
  
 
	
  ! 

! another range check with your assistant holding the aircraft with the engine running at various speeds. If the servos jitter or move inadvertently, there may be a problem. We 			
H
 

> 



!
 Look for loose servo connections or binding pushrods. Also, be certain that the battery has been fully charged. The present model



### About 100 feet

Range check mode Range checking on low power.



# Warning
'

! *Since the range of the radio waves is short, if the model is too far from the transmitter, control will be lost and the model will crash.

# 40 <Receiver and Servo Installation> 

# RECEIVER AND SERVO INSTALLATION

**Receiver switch Receiver battery** 

**Charging port**

**Servos** 

### R7008SB (output connector section)

s CH1~6: Output connectors 1~6 s"/UTPUTCONNECTORSAND0OWERSUPPLY s3"/UTPUTCONNECTORSOR3"53SYSTEM s3"533"53SYSTEM

CH1~8, S.BUS/ (2)
, B 

## Receiver and servos connection diagram

Always connect the necessary number of servos. The receiver channel assignment depends on the model type. See the Servo connection by model type tables. 

# Receiver and servos connection Connect the receiver and servos in accordance with the connection diagram shown below. Always read the section [Before using]. When mounting the receiver and servos to the fuselage, connect the necessary points in accordance with the model's instruction manual.

# 41 <Receiver and Servo Installation> 

# Servo connection by model type

The T14SG transmitter channels are automatically assigned for optimal combination according to the type selected with the Model Type function of the Linkage Menu. The channel assignment (initial setting) for each model type is shown below. Connect the receiver and servos to match the type used.

*The set channels can be checked at the Function screen of the Linkage Menu. The channel assignments can also be changed. For more information, read the description of the Function menu. 

## Airplane/glider Normal wing and V-tail

1Aileron 2Aileron 2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aile ron+2FLAP

Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplan e Glider Airplane Glider

1 Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Ailero n Aileron Aileron Aileron
2 Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevato r Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator
3 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Rudder Rudd er Rudder Rudder
4 Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2
5 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX6 Gear AUX5 Flap Flap Aileron3 Aileron3 6 VPP AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap2 Flap2 Aileron4 Aileron4 7 AUX5 AUX5 VPP AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Flap3 Flap3 Flap Flap 8 AUX4 AUX4 AUX5 AUX5 VPP AUX5 Flap2 Flap2 Flap4 Flap4 Flap2 Flap2
9 AUX1 AUX1 Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber 10 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Butterfly AUX1 Butterfly VPP Butterfly Gear Butterfly Gear Butterfly
11 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor
12 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 VPP AUX1 VPP AUX1
DG1 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
DG2 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW



### 1Aileron 2Aileron 2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aile ron+2FLAP

Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplan e Glider Airplane Glider

1 Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Ailero n Aileron Aileron Aileron
2 Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevato r Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator
3 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Rudder Rudd er Rudder Rudder
4 Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2
5 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX6 Elevator2 Elevator2 Flap Flap Aileron3 Aileron3 6 VPP AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap2 Flap2 Aileron4 Aileron4
7 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Flap3 Flap3 Flap Flap
8 AUX4 AUX4 VPP AUX5 Elevator2 Elevator2 Flap2 Flap2 Flap4 Flap4 Flap2 Flap2
9 AUX1 AUX1 Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber 10 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Butterfly VPP Butterfly Gear Butterfly Gear Butterfly Gear Butterfly
11 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 VPP AUX1 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor
12 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2
DG1 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
DG2 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW 

### RX

RX CH

CHFASST 7CHS-FHSSFASSTest 12CHFASSTest 14CH FASST MULTFASST 7CHS-FHSSFASSTest 12CHFASSTest 14CH FASST MULT 

## Ailvator (Dual Elevator)The outputCH of eachsystemThe outputCH of eachsystem

# 42 <Receiver and Servo Installation> Flying wing, Delta wing (Winglet 2 Rudder) Flying wing, Delta wing

2Aileron 2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLA P

Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplan e Glider

1 Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Ailero n Aileron
2 VPP AUX4 VPP AUX4 VPP AUX4 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2
3 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Rudder Rudder Aileron3 Aileron3
4 Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder VPP AUX4 Aileron4 Aileron4 5 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX6 Gear AUX6 Flap Flap Rudder Rudder 6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Flap Flap Flap2 Flap2 VPP AUX4
7 AUX6 AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap3 Flap3 Flap Flap 8 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 Flap2 Flap2 Flap4 Flap4 Flap2 Flap2
9 Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevato r Elevator Elevator
10 Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber 11 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Butterfly AUX1 Butterfly Gear Butterfly Gear Butterfly
12 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor
DG1 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
DG2 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW 

### RX

CHFASST 7CHS-FHSSFASSTest 12CHFASSTest 14CH FASST MULT



### RX 2Aileron 2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLA P

Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplan e Glider

1 Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Ailero n Aileron
2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2
3 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Rudder Rudder Aileron3 Aileron3
4 Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder2 Rudder2 Aileron4 Aileron4 5 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX6 Gear AUX6 Flap Flap Rudder Rudder 6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Flap Flap Flap2 Flap2 Rudder2 Rudder2
7 VPP AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap3 Flap3 Flap Flap 8 AUX5 AUX5 VPP AUX5 Flap2 Flap2 Flap4 Flap4 Flap2 Flap2
9 Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevato r Elevator Elevator
10 Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber 11 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Butterfly VPP Butterfly Gear Butterfly Gear Butterfly
12 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor
DG1 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
DG2 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW 

### CHFASST 7CHS-FHSSFASSTest 12CHFASSTest 14CH FASST MULT



### * Output channels differ by each system of a table. When using a system with few channels, there is a wing type which cannot be used. It cannot be used when there is a function required out of 
	
	
The outputCH of eachsystemThe outputCH of eachsystem 

## Airplane/glider

# 43 <Receiver and Servo Installation> ● FASSTest12CH ● FASSTest14CH/FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH/S-FHSS

CH 

### All Other H-4, H4X Swash 1 Aileron Aileron 2 Elevator Elevator 3 Throttle Throttle 4 Rudder Rudder 5 Gyro/RUD Gyro/RUD 6 Pitch Pitch 7 Governor Governor 8 Needle Elevator2 9 Gyro2/AIL Gyro2/AIL 10 Gyro3/ELE Gyro3/ELE 11 AUX1 AUX1 12 AUX1 AUX1 DG1 SW SW DG2 SW SWFASST 7CHS-FHSSFASSTest 14CH FASST MULT



### CH 

### All Other H-4, H4X Swash 1 Aileron Aileron 2 Elevator Elevator 3 Throttle Throttle 4 Rudder Elevator2 5 Pitch Pitch 6 Gyro/RUD Gyro/RUD 7 Governor Governor 8 Governor 2 Rudder 9 Gyro2/AIL Gyro2/AIL 10 Gyro3/ELE Gyro3/ELE DG1 SW SW DG2 SW SWFASSTest 12CH 

## Helicopter

¦%L!`5

 
D#500 ̈$#
$`
	 governor is not used.The outputCH of eachsystemThe outputCH of eachsystem

# 44 <Model Basic Setting Procedure> 

# MODEL BASIC SETTING PROCEDURE

1. Model addition and selection

Initially, the T14SG assigns the first model to model-01 in the transmitter. The Model Select function of the Linkage Menu is used to add models and to select amongst models which are already set.

The T14SG is capable of storing data for up to 30 models in its internal memory. Additional model data can also be saved to an optional SD card.

The currently selected model name is displayed 	j	

 before changing any settings, always confirm the model name.

When a new model is added, the Model type select screen and System mode setup screen automatically appear. Please be aware that the transmitter will stop transmitting temporarily when you change the model.When a new model is added, you will need to relink the receiver.

2. Model type selection Select the model type matched to the aircraft with the Model Type select function of the Linkage Menu. For an airplane, select the model type from among the 2 types: airplane and glider. And then select the wing type and the tail type matched to the aircraft. 

# Airplane/glider basic setting procedure
3. Fuselage linkage Connect the ailerons, elevators, throttle, rudder, etc. in accordance with the model's instruction manual. For a description of the connection method, see the Receiver and Servos Connection. Note that even for the same "airplane model", when the wing type and tail type are different, the channel assignment may be different. (The channel assigned to each function can be checked at the Function menu of the Linkage Menu.)

 <




4:








 )	
0


 %: 
 
 $  


 	
  
 	
4  
 

!
" 3#!,
 	
:!
#$

 	
4!$ 

 
,
#
,
 :
!$D
D 	!
!
!





## 4. Throttle cut setting (Airplane)

Throttle cut can be performed with one touch by a switch without changing the throttle trim position. Set throttle cut with the Throttle Cut function of the Linkage Menu. After activating the throttle cut function and selecting the switch, adjust the throttle position so that the carburetor becomes fully closed. For safety, the throttle cut function operates the

# 45 <Model Basic Setting Procedure> throttle stick in the 1/3 or less (slow side) position.

5. Idle down setting (Airplane)

The idling speed can be lowered with one touch by a switch without changing the throttle trim position. Perform this setting with the Idle Down function of the Linkage Menu. After activating the Idle Down function and selecting the switch, adjust the idle down speed. For safety, the idle down function acts only when the throttle stick is in the lowest part of its throw.

*While the Throttle Cut function is in operation, the Idle Down function does not work.



## 6. D/R function

D/R function is used to adjust the throw and operation curve of the stick functions (aileron, elevator, rudder and throttle) for each switch #

$
#$ 7


	
 the maximum throw directions in the End Point settings.

(Airplane)

(Glider)

7. Airbrake (Airplane)

This function is used when an airbrake is necessary when taking off or diving, etc. Please note: this menu item is only available under certain 
8


 if a single aileron wing type has been selected.

75


		

 be activated by a switch. The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, and flap servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the 	




 be adjusted. You can also set the Auto Mode, which will link Airbrake to a stick, switch, or dial. A separate stick switch or dial can also be set as the ON/OFF switch.

WE			\#"		,
$

The Condition Select function automatically allocates the normal condition (NORMAL) for each model. NORMAL is the default condition and is the only one active when a new model type is 

	



	 to a description of the CONDITION function.

*The NORMAL is always on, and remains on until other conditions are activated by switches, stick positions, etc. Please refer to the section entitled Switch Selection Method for additional information on how to do so. *It is possible to customize the activation of the flight conditions. *The Condition Delay can be programmed for each channel. The Condition Delay is used to change the servo throw smoothly when switching conditions.

# 46 <Model Basic Setting Procedure> 1. Model addition and selection

Initially, the T14SG assigns the first model to model-01 in the transmitter. To add new models or to select a model already programmed, use the Model Select function of the Linkage Menu.

This is convenient when selecting a model after entering the model's names in advance. The T14SG is capable of storing up to 30 models in the transmitter's internal memory. Additional models can also be stored in an optional SD card.

The currently selected model is displayed in the middle of the screen. Before flying and before changing any settings, always confirm the model

name. When a new model is added, the Model Type select screen and system mode setup screen automatically appear. Change, or check that they match the swash type and receiver type of the model used.

When a new model is added, you will need to relink the receiver.

2. Model type and swash type selection

If a different model type is already selected, select helicopter with the Model Type function of the Linkage Menu, and then select the swash type matched to the helicopter.

*The Model Type function automatically selects the appropriate output channels, control functions, and mixing 

# Helicopter basic setting procedure

This section outlines examples of use of the helicopter functions of the T14SG. Adjust the actual values, etc. to match the fuselage used.

functions for the chosen model type. Six swash types are available for helicopters. *For a description of the swash type selection, refer to the MODEL TYPE function. 

## 3. Flight condition addition 7
		nditions per model.

The Condition Select function automatically 
	  <
	  0%)  <+),8
1"73,  <+),8
-"73,  <+),8
'"73  /)+/	
 Note: Since you may accidentally activate a condition that not previously setup during		

		 deleting conditions that are not used. *For a description of the condition deletion, refer to the Condition Select function. 

## The NORMAL condition is always on, and remains on until other conditions are activated by switches.

The priority is throttle hold/idle up 3/idle up 2/ idle up 1/normal. Throttle hold has the highest priority. The Condition Delay can be programmed for each channel and condition. The Condition Delay is used to change the servo throw smoothly when switching conditions. ,


	\#"		
#	


$ !&8

	D$




 8
!
	
	
	 

### <
$1&$

"73,



8
4$4
!

 

### <
$-&$

"73,


8
 

### #
&$

"73.


8


# 47 <Model Basic Setting Procedure> 5. Throttle/Pitch curve setting

This function adjusts the throttle or pitch operation curve in relation to the movement of the throttle stick for each condition.

7"
	
	
#	




Activate the throttle curve of each condition with the condition select switch. !
:!


! 
 

   
 
 


 
 
	 # 
  :
 	


$
!
 	
$

$D 
 

### <
$
:!


#
  
 #
 
 

  
 !

 $44'+4
 

### #

:!


*>!



$C 
C
	 

## <

		"	
	
#

Activate the pitch curve of each condition with the condition select switch. 

!

0

$
	$$5!
9 o ~6 o

 "

$
	
$ 
9C$
 *Stability at hovering may be connected to the throttle curve. Adjustment is easy by using the hovering throttle function and hovering pitch function together. 

### 

<
$1

#

$1$



 !
 
H	 "
3E o 1- o  

### 

<
$-

#
	
$
	

$1 #
B o

 

### 

/

%4

!5!!$  
	
 ?
	

	
5!$
@ #
&3E o 1- o 

## 4. Servo Connection Connect the throttle rudder, aileron, elevator, pitch, and other servos in accordance with the kit instruction manual. For a description of the connection method, see "Receiver and Servos Connection". Note: The channel assigned to each function can be checked at the Function menu of the Linkage Menu.

 < 
 
  $
  
 


 
4 
 
 


   
)	
0
%

% 

/31!


%:

$

	 .
  *
 
 
 	
   


 

!
  %:

$
	



>


" 3#! ,
#$

	
4 !$ 


, 

"$

,5
$/31!


*If any interactions are noticed, for a description of the linkage correction function, please refer to the SWASH function.

# 48 <Model Basic Setting Procedure> function from the Model Menu, and set the curve for each condition. (At initial setting, this function is in the "INH" state. To use it, set it to the "ON" state.) 
#	




Activate the mixing curve of each condition with the condition select switch. %

	
5!$
 
 
8+!5	
!

8
 
 
	 
!  
  
  !
	
!  $

 

### 
8+!5	<
$1

8

4$4:
 
	
		


	 
 

### 
8+!5	/

#


	
	 	
	
#
 $
 
!

C o

 

## 9. Throttle hold setting

*If throttle hold is necessary, please refer to the THR HOLD function.



## 10. Throttle cut setting

Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop the
! at idle. The action is not functional at high throttle to avoid accidental dead sticks. The switch’s location and direction must be chosen, as it defaults to NULL.

*With throttle stick at idle, adjust the cut position until the engine consistently shuts off, but throttle linkage is not binding. 

## **E	!
"		
	

	


 pitch interaction The swash mix function is used to correct the swash plate in the aileron (Left/Right Cyclic) and elevator (Forward/Aft Cyclic) direction corresponding to each operation of each condition. 6. D/R function

D/R function is used to adjust the throw and operation curve of aileron, elevator and rudder for each condition.

*For throttle and pitch curve settings, refer to the aforementioned "Throttle/Pitch curve setting" 

## 7


	_+
 the maximum throw directions.

SE	,	
	
	
	!"#

The gyro sensitivity and mode switching function is utilized to adjust the gyro mixing of the model, and can be set for each condition.

 !
	&.


!5!!  <
 $ 1D<
 $ -D#
 & .


!!!  /

4	3



$
4!
 


		




## WE	"		()	#	
# Note: When using a Futaba GY Gyro, or other heading hold gyro, this Pitch to RUD mixing should not be used. The reaction torque is corrected by the gyro. When operating the gyro in the AVCS mode, the mixed signal will cause neutral deviation symptoms and the gyro will not operate normally.



## Use this function when you want to suppress the torque generated by the changes in the pitch and speed of the main rotor during pitch operation. Adjust it so that the nose does not swing in the rudder direction. However, when using a heading hold gyro like those shown above, do not use Pitch to rudder mixing.

Activate the Pitch to rudder (Pit -->RUD) mixing

# 49 <Model Basic Setting Procedure> *ME	7"
	#	
#

*If throttle mixing is necessary for a compensation for

slowing of engine speed caused by swash plate operation during aileron or elevator operation, please refer to the THROTTLE MIX function.



## *E	'"
	

	# 



!5

#!5	

	

	 


		
3!5
 :!
%



 

 

### .
!5

#!5	

	
!5	
 



# 50 <Functions of System Menu> 

# SYSTEM MENU

System Menu functions table [TRAINER]: Starts and sets the trainer system. [DISPLAY]: LCD and back-light adjustment [USER NAME]: User name registration [SOUND]: Turns off the buzzer. [H/W SET]: H/W reverse, calibration and stick mode [START SEL.]: Immediately, a model selection can be performed [AUTO LOCK]: The automatic lock function of two kinds of touch sensors [INFO]: Displays the program version, SD card information, product ID, and language selection. [SBUS SERVO]: S.BUS servo setting. The System Menu sets up functions of the transmitter: This does not set up any model data.

 * 
 
! !
  
 

	
"A" 

!
 

4


"

 ?"A"#,0 0,8@



!
 

  	 
 RTN   HOME/ EXIT  $


%

$

 

### <SensorTouchTM>



### "







$

 	
#  " 0	

RETURN

# 51 <Functions of System Menu> 

# TRAINER #

!	




## T14SG trainer system makes it possible for the instructor to chose which channels and operation modes that can be used in the students transmitter. The function and rate of each channel can be set, the training method can also be matched to the student's skill level. Two transmitters must be connected by an optional Trainer Cord, and the Instructors’ transmitter should be programmed for trainer operation, as described below.

When the Instructor activates the trainer switch, the student has control of the aircraft (if MIX/ FUNC/NORM mode is turned on, the Instructor can make corrections while the student has control). When the switch is released the Instructor regains control. This is very useful if the student gets the aircraft into an undesirable situation. "
	

!
 "

 
:
0<D8*D

0!
 %


 






 NOTE: This trainer system can be used in the following manner; 1. With the T14SG transmitter and a conventional

transmitter, if the channel order is different, it is necessary to match the channel order before using this function. You can select the channel of input data

from student's transmitter in the "FUNC" or "MIX" mode. 2. When the T14SG is used as the instructor’s

transmitter, set the modulation mode of the student’s transmitter to PPM. If being used as the student, T14SG can be connected to the instructor's transmitter which the PPM mode as the student's modulation mode is required. T14SG always sends PPM mode signal from the trainer jack. 3. Be sure that all channels work correctly in



Corresponding types of transmitters and trainer mode settings:

#$
!
 <6!

	 "
6!

	 "
!#$
 #

	 "
!#$
 #

	 #
* < "
 0!
 */!
 0!
 */!
 0! #1;".D#1B0 #1;".D#1B0 %  1;*/D1F*/ %  1;*/D1F*/ - #1-.8#0;;C9 G*8#0;;19

#
* #1;". #1;043;C4 #1-4#1-.4 3'C %  1-*/ *03.' -;. 1-*/ 

0

#1;". #B.43-C %  1-*/ %""#30)#-

- - B*/ %""#308)#

#1;". #1C*4#G*4 #E*4#F,4

#;, %  B*/ 

0 - - #1-.8#0;;C9
#1;". #1C*.4#E* %  B*/ %  - - #1-.8#0;;C9 #1;". #B4#F %  B*/ %  - -

#1-.8#0;;C9 G*8#0;;19

#
* #1;043;C4 #1-4#1-.4 3'C #1;". %  1-*/ %  1-*/ -
#B.43-C #1;". %  1-*/ %  1-*/ - #1C*4#1C*.4

#G*4#E*4 #E*4#B #1;". %  - %  B*/ -

# 52 <Functions of System Menu> "


!




"
! !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN



## Mode and switch selection 1%
 
 
$ 

 $	
 ; 

 	
"1 

!


-0


?%*#@?1-DB*/@ 
!
#  
$!
 '"

 
 !
  	 
 


 #
 $  # 
 # 	

!
#
!
 
!
	
4
"1 

 2%*#2&, 
$
 		?@ ?@  21-DB*/2&7




#1;".4 #1;04#1-4#1-.3;C4

?1-*/@ 



?B*/@

<		

& ;0


?"7@
! 
# 


$


  "

2"

!
2

 !

!



 2"72&"




  <
	&"/

*The switch mode can also be selected when setting the ON position on the switch setup screen. When [ALTERNATE OFF] is selected, normal ON/OFF operation is performed. When [ALTERNATE ON] is selected, the trainer function is alternately turned on and off each time the switch is operated. This allows alternate ON/OFF switching even when a momentary switch (SH) is used. 

### "

?#%<,@
"
!!






$

 
 	
# 

Note: The trainer function won’t be turned on unless the Instructor's transmitter receives signals from the student's transmitter. Be sure to confirm this after connecting your trainer cable.



## Operating mode selection "
$

$	
13'

10


?0+,@
!



	

 # 
$!
 -"

 
 !
  	 
 


 #
 $  # 
 # 	

!
#
!
 
!
	
4
"1 

 20+,2&"




$
!
 



NORM: The model is controlled by signals from the student

transmitter. MIX mode: The model is controlled by signals from the

instructor and student transmitters. (Reset the student's model data to the default condition.) FUNC mode (function mode): The model is controlled by

signals from the student transmitter with the instructor 's setting. (Reset the student's model data to the default condition.) OFF: Only the instructor side operates.



## Adjusting the student's rate.

*This can be adjusted for students who may need lower rates than a more experienced student. " 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$

# 53 <Functions of System Menu> 10


?%#,@
!



	

 # 
$!
 -%:

 	



 2%#,2&%:



  "
		
&C1CC  <
&1CC

*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, touch the RTN button for one second.


### '#
:!
4
#  

!




## Changing the student's channel

*The setting above allows setting of the channel assignment of student side when [MIX] or [FUNC] was selected. 

### 10


?"#8*/@
!



	

 # 
$!
 -"



 	



 #
 $  # 
 # 	


#
!
 
!
	
4
"1 

 2"#8*/2&0



 <6  
6 !
 # 
$ !

 

!
4
 0


 	$

$#

 

 !
0
$ 	
 
	!


# 54 <Functions of System Menu> "


!




"
! !
 	 RTN  

.  HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN



## LCD contrast adjustment 1"

2*#%"#2
# 


$!
: 
 	



 2*#%"#2& %: 
   
 

 
 
 	 
 

 $  "
		
&)	
C19+
  <
&9

*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, touch the RTN button for one second.


### -#
# 
:!
 

!




## Back-light brightness adjustment 1"

 2<./#,""2   
 #


$!
 :
 3	 	
 	 



 2<./#,""2&%:
 	

 

 
 
 	 
 

 $  "
		
&41-C)	
  <
&1C

*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, touch the RTN button for one second. 

# DISPLAY )*+ 3	:!
4
!



## LCD contrast, back-light brightness and backlight off-timer adjustment are possible:

Moreover, a display unit can be chosen from the metric system or yard/pound.

-#
# 
:!
 

!




## Back-light off-timer 1"

2#<0,2
# 


$!
: 
 3	3!
 	



 2#<0,2&%:
!


 3 	   
 $
	 
 

  "
		
&1C-;C

1C
4   <
&1C


*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, touch the RTN button for one second.


### -#
# 
:!
 

!
 

## Unit system adjustment 1"

28<#"A"2
# 


$!
: 
 	



 "
		
&0,#<*A%+D
8+

-#
# 
:!
 

!
 "

?+<"
)%A@

!!





$

 
 	
 # 

" 0	 %:	

# 55 <Functions of System Menu> "


!




"
! !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT         $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# USER NAME 8
!

	



## This function allows the modelers to change the T14SG user name.

*A name of up to 10 characters can be entered as the user name. Please note that a space is also counted as one character.



## User name registration 1*	


!

 
 
&

 ?0	
!

@  "

?}@?~@4
# 

 ?+

	
@  7
?+,),#,@



#  
4

!!


 





 ?%	
@  7
  
  


 ! 
 

# 
4  
  
  
 $ !!



 *A name of up to 10 characters long can be entered as the user name. (A space is also counted as 1 character.)


### -8$!$
	
$4

?,#,@   
 #  # 
!
 $

	
4

 ?*%*,)@
#  *
1D'

*
-D'

*
'D' "

 ?8", %0,@  
 "
! !
 




$

 
 	 
#  8
!



" 0	

# 56 <Functions of System Menu> "


!




"
! !
 	 RTN  

.  HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# SOUND #
 




## The warning sound and other sounds of the T14SG transmitter can be turned off.

*When “WARNING” was set to OFF, the no operation alarm

(30 minutes), mixing warning sound, and low battery alarm sounds also turned off.



### "

?"8+@

!!





$

 
 	
 # 



## On/off operation 10


?#<0,@?7%<.@

?#/,"8+@
!
# 
$!
 -"


 	



 *The display blinks. 

### '#
#  " 0	 "

	!

# 57 <Functions of System Menu> "


!




"
! !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN



## Operation direction reversal method 1"

?/D7,,",@


$



 
 	
# 

-0



!
$	 
/D7



 
# 
 $!
 ' "

 
 !
  	 
 


 #
 $  7
 
 # 
4
$

 


#
!

!
	
4 
"1 

 202&!$

  2,2&$




 

# H/W SETTING /



!



## H/W reverse This function reverses the operation direction of the sticks, switches, trimmer levers, and knobs. Note: This setting reverses the actual operation

signal, but does not change the display indicators. Use the Normal mode as long as there is no special reason to use the Reverse mode. 

## Stick mode

This function changes the stick mode of transmitter. Note: This will not change the throttle ratchet, etc. Those are mechanical changes that must be performed by a Futaba service center. Note: After changing the mode, these changes

are only applied to new models. It is not applied to an existing model. 

## Stick calibration

J1-J4 stick correction can be performed.

"

?/D7",#@

!!





$

 
 	
 # 



## Changing stick mode 1"

?"#<*I0+,@


$



 
 	
# 

-0


2"#<*I0+,2
! 
# 
 $!
 '"


!
#
$ 7



# 
4
!
 	
#
!

!
	
4 
"1 

(J1) (J2)

(J4) (J3)

0
 1 - ' ;

1 %
 #
 ,
 
 - %
 ,
 #
 
 ' 
 #
 ,
 %
 ; 
 ,
 #
 %
 %

$

 " 0	

# 58 <Functions of System Menu> Stick calibration method

*J3 and J4 correction is described below. J1 and J2 corrections are performed using the same procedure. 

### 1"

?*%)<%#<@


$



 
 	
# 

-0
 
   
 '3;   
# 

'0

';

$ $

# 



;"

';
 ! 	
 


9"

';
$



 


F#
  
 !$

 
 


$
 $

  
   
$
!
!

# 59 <Functions of System Menu> "


!




"
! !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT         $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN



## Setting Up and Adjusting the Quick Select Models 1#
 " "

 "#%# ",) !
 



	
#1;"."
!0
 #
!

$

 "A" "
!   !
  8
 
 "
#		
""

 "#%#",)
$


# >!




-#
""

"#%#",)!
$ 
!
	"

  0
 "

 
  $$ 
  # 

"

0
"

4 
 
 "
#    
  
	


!	
7
 		
4$


 # 

"
#
 	!	
$7
 "

8<*I",)
4$

 
# 
	!

 








## Quick Select Activation: With the Quick Select (QUICK SEL.) option activated, there are two additional options available for customization; ALWAYS and MDL (Model). These options determine if/when the Quick Select information will appear on-screen. ALWAYS, as the name suggests, indicates that each time the transmitter is powered-up, the Quick Select information will appear on-screen. The MDL (Model) setting indicates that the Quick Select information will appear on-screen only when the MDL button is pressed simultaneously as the transmitter is turned ON. With the Quick Select mode highlighted, use the SensorTouch to move to the activation setting options. Model (MDL) is the default setting. Press the Return (RTN) button to bring forth the options, then scroll to the ALWAYS setting using the SensorTouch pad. Press the Return#\7E$


Y START SEL is a function which starts and can perform a model selection immediately. Each time, it is convenient for the modeler which is enjoying two or more models by one of a transmitter. Quick Select Screen

As the name suggests, the Quick Model Select Function enables the modeler to change the selected models rapidly each time the transmitter is turned ON. With a few quick touches, it is possible to change models whereas before it would require a multi-step process. The T14SG stores up to four models in the Quick Select offerings.
Model Select Screen

When the transmitter is turned on, it will open to the Model Selection Screen immediately. 

# START SEL. <!!

4!


 
$
!


# 60 <Functions of System Menu> Assigning models to the sensor buttons: There are four sensors/buttons that correspond with the SensorTouch: Link (LNK), Model (MDL) System (SYS) and S1. As such, it is possible to offer up to four models available through the Quick Select <


 most often. 18
 
 "
#4   
 




D 
>!
(
5!$
4 ))I -7 
 $ 
5  
 

 
 		
4$


# 
 !
 '8	 
 "
#4  	 
  
 !
  # 

 
 

 !
4$


#  ;
$




!	




## Using the sensors to select the model: 1#  
 !
4 	 


 "

 

  < 0
 0+)  


4$

 

$

 0
0+)

$
	$
 !


* Please note: Even if the Quick Select function is active, the Power Mode screen will appear when the transmitter is turned ON while simultaneously pressing the Return (RTN) button. 

### -#


!
	
$


4 
3



 5!$
40+,)3C'	
"14 
3 "1 	
	4
0
 3C'#
#1;".
 
 >!



!
!
! 	
	 * If the Return (RTN) button is double-clicked, the T14SG the current model is selected as indicated on the display. That is, the model that was used prior to the last time the transmitter was turned OFF. 

## Model Select Screen This allows the Model Select screen to be accessed immediately upon turning ON the transmitter.

* Please note: this function cannot be utilized at the same time as the Quick Select function. If more than four models are


[%	 utilized as it will save time when selecting the desired aircraft. 			
"!% would be the best choice. * Please note: the Model Select function does not allow access to the RENAME, COPY or DELETE options. To utilize one of these options, please access the Model Select screen in the typical manner as described in the complete instruction manual. 

### 1#
 " "

 "#%# ",) !
 



	
#1;". "
!0
 #
!

$

 "A" "
!   !
  8
 
 "
#		
""

 "#%#",)
$


# >!




-#
""

"#%#",)!
$ 
!
	"

  0
 "

 
  $$ 
  # 

"

0
"

4
 
"
#

	 


!	
7
 		
4$


#  

"
#
	 
0
"

0+,)",)


 
# 
	
 0
"






## Model Select Activation: With the Model Select (MODEL SEL.) option activated, there are two additional options available for customization; ALWAYS and MDL (Model). These options determine if/when the Model Select information will appear on-screen. ALWAYS, as the name suggests, indicates that each time the transmitter is powered-up, the Model Select information will appear on-screen. The MDL (Model) setting indicates that the Model Select information will appear on-screen only when the MDL button is pressed simultaneously as the transmitter is turned ON. With the Model Select mode highlighted, use the

# 61 <Functions of System Menu> SensorTouch to move to the activation setting options. Model (MDL) is the default setting. Press the Return (RTN) button to bring forth the options, then scroll to the ALWAYS setting using the SensorTouch pad. Press the Return (RTN) button 


Y

Using the Model Select Function: 1#  
 !
4 	 


0
 "

 

  < 0
 0+)  


4$

 

$

 0
0+)

$
	$
 !
 *Please note: Even if the Model Select function is active, the Power Mode screen will appear when the transmitter is turned ON while simultaneously pressing the Return (RTN) button. 

### -#
"
#


!	 
 3

 !
 #
 
 !
 ! 
		


 !

<

!
 

4

"
#	 
  
 $( 
 		
 	  %	4  

  !
4 $


# 	 #
 #1;". 
   
   >!



!
!
! 	


# 62 <Functions of System Menu> "


!




"
! !
 	 RTN  

.  HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN



### ● Lock release Every lock function's touch [ 1 s econd or more ] of S1 button will release the lock

. ● Lock release Every lock function's touch [ 1 s econd or more ] of HOME/EXIT button will release the lock

. ● Manual lock If S1 button is touched 1 s econd or more from a HOME screen, a SensorTouch locks manually. ● Manual lock If HOME/EXIT button is touched 1
s econd or more from a HOME screen, a SensorTouch locks manually.

● Display of a lock If locked, there will be sound and the icon of a key will come out. 

## Auto lock method 1$
 
 %  

  
 
!

!


- %: 
  !
  
 % )#
!
 
		 !!



/0,

 
#
!
: 


 
!
 $  'C 
  < 
 !
 
4$$ 


'#
 " ) 
	 4  
 
4 !  
 #1;". 
 
 !
$

$#
 
!
64$

 "1




*If neither the Lock Timer or Start Lock functions are active

(OFF), then the key lock remains even if the power is turned off. *If the Lock Timer is enabled and the Start Lock is off, the key lock status is canceled each time the T14SG is turned on. 

## The Auto Lock function makes it possible to lock the transmitter to prevent any unwanted input from 

 The auto lock function can be set in two ways. LOCK TIMER

Auto Lock functions automatically when there is no operation from the HOME screen display for a chosen number of seconds. START LOCK Auto Lock functions automatically when the model changes or power is turned on.

*To temporarily allow access to the T14SG programming press and hold the S1 or HOME/EXIT bitton for one second. Please note, the Auto Lock function timer will resume immediately once again. 

# AUTO LOCK #
!"
#



# Danger

It is recommended to Lock the %7 any accidental touches which could change settings and cause an accident.

# 63 <Functions of System Menu> "


!




"
! !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT         $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# INFO +$
$	!
4"+!4$<+



## The T14SG system program version information, SD card information (current and maximum	


$
 ID are displayed on the Information screen.

*When the SD card is not inserted, the SD card information is not displayed. 

## The language displayed in home, menu, and setup screen is selectable.

"

?<@

!!





$

 
 	
# 



## Information  2
+8*#2&
<+! 
  2<+2&<+! 
  2)%.8%.,2&#
		

#1;". 2,"<2".
!$	!
 !  2%,%2&%

#1;".  2*%+"<,2&*
D05!!! 
 !

>
"+ 

## Language selection 10


2)%.8%.,2
!


# 
 $!
 -*	

		
 	



 #
 $  7
 
 # 
4
		
	
 #
!

	
4
,+<# $
"1  " 0	 "

	!

# 64 <Functions of System Menu> "


!




"
! !
 	 RTN  

.  HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

### "8"

	



## An S.BUS servo can memorize the channel and various settings you input. Servo setting can be performed on the T14SG screen by wiring the servo as shown in the figure.

"

?"8+@

!!





$

 
 	
 # 
" 0	 "

	!



## Servo ID number Individual ID numbers are memorized for your S.BUS(2) servos in your T14SG. When a servo is used, the servo ID number is automatically read by the transmitter. If you use multiple S.BUS(2) servos and do not want to change the settings on all that are mounted in a fuselage, only the desired servo in the
'	


servo.

* S9070SB cannot be arranged by T14SG. * With some S.BUS(2) servos, there are some functions with cannot be used. If a function cannot be used, the display screen will change. (Only the function which can be used by a servo is displayed.) * After reading completion, with connection of the above 	
!	
	 can be operated and carried out.



## Procedure for changing S.BUS servo setting 1"

?"8"",@
"
!0
 -7



>	
 
 '

?,*%))@$	
'"1$



#
<+

	

 $
?,*%))@
 ⇒ #  $
 ⇒ #$
1
 ;7
!$




	
 ?</@
	

<+! 

 

?%*#@


<+

 
 9"


!






5$	
 F   
  
    ? 7  < # , @     $  	 
  '  ? 7  < # , @   


 ⇒ #$
 ⇒ #$
1 
#

	
	
  ?<<#@4    
  
  
$
?<<#@
 ⇒ # $
 ⇒ #$
1
 "8"D"8"- "
 
 #1;". '3   A3

 

# SBUS SERVO

# 65 <Functions of System Menu> 

# S.BUS Servo Description of function of each parameter

*There are a function which can be used according to the kind of servo, and an impossible function. 

###  Displays the ID of the servo whose parameters are to be read. It cannot be changed. 

### 
Channel of the S.BUS system assigned to the servo. Always assign a channel before use. 

### 
 The direction in which the servo rotates can be changed. 

###  When “Retractable” is selected and the servo has been continuously stopped for 30 seconds, the dead band expands and unnecessary hold current due to external force is eliminated. When a new control signal enters, normal operation is resumed. When using the servo as a landing gear servo, select “Retractable”. Also adjust the servo travel to match the landing gear movement range. 

### 	 Restricts operation in the specified direction the instant the power is turned on. By using this setting, the first initial movement when the power is turned on slowly moves the servo to the specified position. 

###  The state of the servo when the servo input signal is lost can be specified. The "Hold" mode setting holds the servo in its last commanded position even if using AM or FM system. 

###  This function changes smoothness of the servo operation relative to stick movement changes. Smooth setting is used for normal flight. Select the "OFF" mode when quick operation is necessary such as 3D. 

### 	 The neutral position can be changed. When the neutral offset is large value, the servo's range of travel is restricted on one side. 

### 
 Speeds can be matched by specifying the operating speed. The speed of multiple servos can be matched without being affected by motor fluctuations. This is effective for load torques below the maximum torque. However, note that the maximum speed will not be exceed what the servo is capable of even if the servos operating voltage is increased. 

### 		
 The dead band angle at stopping can be specified. **[Relationship between dead band set value and servo operation]**
Small ° Dead band angle is small and the servo is immediately operated by a small signal change. Large ° Dead band angle is large and the servo does not operate at small signal changes. **(Note)** If the dead band angle is too small, the servo will operate continuously and the current consumption will increase and the life of the servo will be shortened. 

### 	! The left and right travels centered about the neutral position can be set independently. 

### " The minimum current applied to the internal motor when starting the servo can be set. Since a small travel does not start the motor, it essentially feels like the dead band was expanded. The motor can be immediately started by adjusting the minimum current which can start the motor. **[Relationship between boost set value and servo operation]**
Small ° Motor reacts to a minute current and operation becomes smooth. Large ° Initial response improves and output torque increases. However, if the torque is too large, operation will become rough.

# 66 <Functions of System Menu> "#$$ OFF : It is the boost ON at the time of low-speed operation.(In the case of usual) ON : It is always the boost ON.(When quick operation is hope) 

### 	 The characteristic when the servo is stopped can be set. When smaller than the standard value, the characteristic becomes an overshoot characteristic. If the value is larger than the standard value, the brake is applied before the stop position. Especially, when a large load is applied, overshoot, etc. are suppressed by inertia and hunting may occur, depending on the conditions. If hunting (phenomena which cause the servo to oscillate) occurs even though the Dead Band, Stretcher, Boost and other parameters are suitable, adjust this parameter to a value larger than the initial value. **[Relationship between damper set value and servo operation]**
Small ° When you want to overshoot. Set so that hunting does not occur. Large ° When you want to operate so that braking is not applied. However, it will feel like the servo response has worsened. **(Note)** If used in the hunting state, not only will the current consumption increase, but the life of the servo will also be shortened. 

### % The servo hold characteristic can be set. The torque which attempts to return the servo to the target position when the current servo position has deviated from the target position can be adjusted. This is used when stopping hunting, etc., but the holding characteristic changes as shown below. **[Relationship between stretcher and servo operation]**
Small ° Servo holding force becomes weaker. Large ° Servo holding force becomes stronger. **(Note)** When this parameter is large, the current consumption increases. 

### "&& When the power supply of a servo is previously turned on at the time of a power supply injection without taking transmit of a transmitter, the buzzer sound of about 2.5 Hz continues sounding from a servo. (Even when the transmit of a transmitter is taken out previously, a buzzer becomes until the signal of a servo is outputted normally, but it is not unusual.)

The transmitter has been turned OFF ahead of a servo power supply → The buzzer sound of about 1.25 Hz continues sounding as servo power supply end failure alarm. ( 

### Do not insert or remove the servo connector while the receiver power is ON. A buzzer may sound by incorrect recognition. )

* Buzzer sound is generated by vibrating the motor of a servo. Since current is consumed and a servo generates heat, please do not operate the number more than needed or do not continue sounding a buzzer for a long time.

# 67 <Functions of Linkage Menu> 

# FUNCTIONS OF LINKAGE MENU

The Linkage Menu is made up of functions which perform model addition, model type selection, system type, end point setting, and other model basic settings. The functions which can be selected depend on the model type. A typical menu screen is shown below.

*The display screen is an example. The screen depends on the model type.



# Linkage Menu functions table [SERVO]: Displays the servo test and operation position [MODEL SEL]: Model addition, call, deletion, copy, model name setting [MODEL TYPE]: Model type, wing type, swash type, etc. selection [SYSTEM]: System mode selection, link of a transmitter and receiver, area mode selection [FUNCTION]: Channel assignment of each function can be changed [SUB-TRIM]: Adjusts the neutral position of each servo [REVERSE]: Reverses the servo travel direction [FAIL SAFE]: Fail safe function and battery fail safe function setting [END POINT]: Servo travel adjustment and limit setting [SERVO SPEED]: Speed setup of a servo [THR CUT]: Stops the engine safely and easily (airplane and helicopter only) [IDLE DOWN]: Lowers the idle speed of the engine (airplane only) ¤%<%\E3¥)J



8
#
$ [SWASH]: Swash AFR and linkage correction function (helicopter only) [T1-T4 SET.]: Control step amount and mode selection of the digital trim [WARNING]: Mixing warning normal reset [TELEMETRY]: Displays various data sent from the receiver. [SENSOR]: Various telemetry sensors setting [DATA RESET]: Model memory set data reset %

)	
!
 
 

$$	
)I !


"


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/ EXIT  $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

*



### "







$

 	
#  *	
$

 " 0	

RETURN

# 68 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# SERVO MONITOR "
#
¡.$+$D+$
$


## This is used for testing servo movement. “Moving Test” (repetition mode) and “Neutral7#8$





The “Neutral Test” is good for finding the neutral position of a servo horn. In order to prevent any potential difficulties, the servo test function will be inoperable, or

%

 the Servo Test function is not operational if the Throttle Cut is ON in either airplane or helicopter modes; or if the Throttle Hold is ON in Helicopter mode.

"

?",@
)	
!





$

 
 	
 #  %?80,8D0@ $

!

!






## Servo test operation 10


?@
!


# 
$ !
  "



!
 	
 

# #
$ #
# 	

 !
#
!
!
	
4 
"1 

 ?0<.@&0

$
$
 
  ?,8#%)@&0


 

$

- 0
 
   
 ?0<.@  ?,8#%)@
!
#  
$!
  "


?@ 	

 
# #
	$$
 " 0	 "

	!

# 69 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# MODEL SELECT #
0
"

$
!!
4

4 

4$4!
!

	


## This function is used to load the settings of the desired model into the T14SG’s memory.

The settings may be selected from either the transmitter’s internal memory or an SD card. Remember that up to 30 model memories are available in the transmitter.

The name of the model stored in the transmitter and the SD card may be changed. This can be very useful to tell different models settings apart. Each model name can be as long as 10 characters, and the model name always appears in the display screen. The Copy function is used to copy parameters, settings, etc. from one model data into a second memory. It may be used for getting a head-start on setting up models with almost the same settings (only		
	 complete model from scratch). Also, this function may be used to make a backup copy of a model setup before any changes are made.

*T14SG can use the model data of T8FGS for SD card, copying it. However, the model data of T14SG cannot be used by T8SG (S).



## Model selection

*Model data saved on the transmitter memory other than the model currently used can be selected. 

### 1 0
 
   
 
 


$2#22*%+2
# 
$!
  "




 	
 

#   ?#@&#!
!
!  ?*%+@&"+ -%
!	



!
 
!
4
#  '0
?",),*#@ ;# 
 #  % ! !
	
$
#
#  



!$



*Transmission stops and then starts in the new model. 

## Model addition *A new model can be added to the transmitter memory. It can not be added to the SD card. 

### 10

?,7@ -# 
 #  % ! !
	
$$
#
#  



*The model type setup screen and frequency setup screen are 




&

 and SYSTEM mode. *Transmission stops and then starts in the new model. *The added model appears in the model list of the model

select setup screen. 

## *Link is required when a new model is

made from a model selection.  "

 ?0+,) ",),*#@  
 )	
 !





$

 
  	
# 

*The display screen is an example. The screen depends on the model type. " 0	 "

	!

0
 *
!


# 70 <Functions of Linkage Menu> Model deletion

*The model stored in the transmitter memory or an SD card can be deleted. *The current model can not be deleted. 

### 1 0
 
   
 
 


$2#22*%+2
# 
$!
  "




 	
 

#   ?#@&#!
!
!  ?*%+@&"+ -0


!
 



!


 #  '0

?+,),#,@ ;#
# 7
>! !
	
$

#   
  
 
4 
 !
  






## Model name change

*The model name of the model stored in the transmitter memory or a SD card can be changed. 

### 1<		
&  0
 
   
 
 
 $2#22*%+2
# 
$!
  "




 	
 

#   ?#@&#!
!
!  ?*%+@&"+ -0


!
 	

!


 #  '0
?,%0,@ ;#
# 

*The model name setup screen is displayed. User name (candidate)



### 9 *	
 
 !
 !
  
 
 &  ?0	

!

@  "

?}@?~@4
#   ?+

	
@  7
?+,),#,@



#  
4

!!


 



  ?%	
@  7
  
  


 ! 
 

# 
4  
  
  
 $ !!



 *A name of up to 10 characters long can be entered as the model name. (A space is also counted as one character.) 

### F%



! 

$4



?,#,@
#  #
!
$

	 
4

?*%*,)@
# 



## Model copy

*A copy can be made of the model stored in the transmitter memory or an SD card. 

### 1<		
&  0
 
   
 
 
 $2#22*%+2
# 
$!
  "




 	
 

#   ?#@&#!
!
!  ?*%+@&"+ -"


!
$
 !


#  '0
?*
A@ ;#
# 

*The copy screen appears.



### 9< 
$	 
 !
 
  


!
!
!&  0
?%++3)<"#@
#  
$!
  "



!
 	
 

#   ?%++3)<"#@&	
!

  ?!
!
@&
$	
!


*The model stored in the SD card can be replaced. 

###  <		
&  0
 
   
 $ 
 $2#22*%+2
# 
$!
  "




 	
 

#  F0
?*
A@ E#
# 7
>!

!
	
$

#  


4
!
 $


# 71 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# MODEL TYPE #


!
$
!!	$
4
$
4 	


(The display screen is an example. The screen depends on the model type.) 

## Six swash types are available for helicopters. Six types of main wings and three types of tail wings are available for airplanes and gliders. Functions and mixing functions necessary for each model type are set in advance at the factory. Note: The Model Type function automatically

selects the appropriate output channels, control functions, and mixing functions for the chosen model type. When the Model Type selection command is accessed, all of the data in the active memory is cleared (except the following swash type.) Be sure that you don’t mind losing this data, or back it up to another memory using the copying functions. When changing the helicopter swash type

within the following groups, you can leave the settings other than the SWASH function. However, this is initialized when you change the swash type to the other swash type group.



## Model type selection 10



!

	

#  
$!
  "

 
 

 $
  	 
 

# % !!
	
$$
#
 # 

  0
?A,"@#
#  

  #
!
$

	 
4
"1 

?@ 
# 

 2#A
,2&0
$  27<.2$
D	
&7	$  2#%<)2$
D	
&#$  2"7%"/2
$
&"$

*The wing types which can be selected depend on the mode; FASST, Multi-ch, or 7ch, etc.



### "

?0+,)#A
,@
)	
!





$

 
 	 
# 

- < 

	 
  
 		 
 
$
$
&

(Helicopter) 

###  0

?@
# 
$!
  "

 ?@  	 
  
 
# %! !
	
$$
#
#   %

$

	#
 
	$!




 Swash type group A: /314/3'4/'4/,' Swash type group B: /3;4/3;

" 0	 "

	!

# 72 <Functions of Linkage Menu> Model type selection (Airplane, Glider)Q#	
	F
$

Q#	
	7

	!#$

(
	

7
	

Model type selection (Helicopter)!
"	

# 73 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

## System Type selection

The T14SG is for 2.4GHz only. The system can be changed from among 5 choices: FASSTest 14CH, FASSTest 12CH, FASST MULTI, FASST 7CH, S-FHSS. It is FASSTest14CH and FASSTest12CH which can be chosen by R7008SB set. The method of selection is to the next page.

*If you change the System Type, other model data is not reset. *If a system type is changed in Helicopter mode, the transmitter will offer two selections: [Yes] : Selection sets the channel order suitable for System Type. (We recommend here. ) [No] : The present channel order is maintained. *After any change, remember to test the model and should fully check servo direction and a motion. *Analog servos cannot be used with the R7008SB in the 

# SYSTEM "
!!

	4






## Area mode selection (Frequency range) The T14SG transmitter has been designed to function in many countries. If you will be utilizing this transmitter in a country other than France, please make sure that [AREA] is set to "G". If, however, this transmitter will be utilized in France, it must be set to "F" in order to comply with French regulations.FASST mode selection

Receiver linking The receiver will only be controlled (without being affected by other transmitters) by the transmitter it is linked to. When using a receiver other than one purchased as a set, linking is necessary. Moreover, a re-link is required when a new model is added by model selection, and the time of system type change. FASSTest 12CH mode. 

## Dual receiver function (only FASSTest 14CH mode)

Dual receivers can be linked with the T14SG. Two receivers are recognized individually by ID numbers. For example, in R7008SB, CH output setting function is used, by setting the first as as "1-8CH", and setting the second as "9-14CH", two sets of receivers can be used as a set in the model, allowing you 14 channels. If a Dual receiver function is used, the following function can set up individually.

・ Battery fail-safe voltage setup

・ Telemetry function ON/OFF

・ Sensor setup

Battery fail-safe voltage setup (only FASSTest mode)

The voltage which battery fail-safe activates, can be set when you link. (3.5-8.4V) The receiver memorizes the setting as it was at link. Suggested setting voltages are as follows. 0E&E[#E
)0L$±@L DJ#E
)KK$±KBKD DJ+#E
)`0$±`D`0 It is a rough reference value. Since it changes with servos carried in the condition and the model of a battery, please set to your own model in a battery consumption current. "

?"A"#,0@
)	
!





$

 
 	
 # 

" 0	 "

	!



## P.37 Linking method Cases when linking is necessary:

・ 7
	





	

・ 7

!!
!	


%""#
1;*/ ↔ %""#
1-*/
 )

・ 7
  
 !
  

  !






# 74 <Functions of Linkage Menu> Telemetry function (FASSTest mode only)

To use the telemetry function, set “Telemetry” to “ACT”.

DL Interval (FASSTest mode only)

When a telemetry function is enabled, the receiving interval (down-link interval) of sensor data can be changed.

If a DL interval is increased, the response of the sensor data display becomes slower, but stick response will improve.

System Type selection procedure 10
 
   
 ?%""#
31;*/@


!
#  
$!


-"

 
 
! $
  	 
 
  ?%""#
31;*/@?%""#
31-*/@?%""#3 08)#@?%""#3E*/@?"3/""@ *An example of selections for each system is on the following page. 

### '#
# 
:!
 

!
 

## Dual receiver function (only FASSTest 14CH mode) procedure 10


?"<.),@
!


# 
 $!


-"


?"<.),@?+8%)@ 	 

 '#
# 
:!
 

!
 

## Area mode selection (Frequency range) procedure 10


?.@
!


# 
$ !


-"


?.@?@ 	



 *"F" is chosen only when using the transmitter is used in France. Leave this in "G" otherwise. 

### '#
# 
:!
 

!




## Telemetry ACT/INH procedure 10


#,),0,#A?%*#@
!


# 
 $!


-"


?%*#@?</@ 	



 '#
# 
:!
 

!




## DL Interval set procedure 10


#,),0,#A+)?1C@


!
#  
$!


-"


+)!
 	



 <  +) 
  

4 
 
$


$ 
!
 
4 
$
!$
  <
&1C  %:!
	
&C1-C '#
# 
:!
 

!
 <+   
! 


$ <+"
 


$

<+8%)4$!


$
 
54





# 75 <Functions of Linkage Menu> System Type ■ FASSTest 14CH

---

■ FASSTest 12CH

---

■ FASST MULTI

---

■ FASST 7CH --- FASST-7CH system receiver mode. Up to 7 channels can be use d. ■ S-FHSS --- S-FHSS system receiver mode. Up to 8 channels can be used. FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with the telemetry se nsor unit. Up to 18 channels (linear 12+ON/OFF2) can be used. FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with receiver voltage display. Up to 12 channels (linear10+ON/OFF2) can be used. Telemetry Sensor canno t be used, but the response speed is a faster than that of the 14CH mode.

FASST-MULTI system receiver mode. Up to 14 channels (linear 12+ ON/OFF2) can be used. s!NALOGSERVOSCANNOTBEUSEDWITHTHE23"INTHE&!334EST #(MODE -Response speed has priority over number of channels -Telemetry requires only the current receiver battery -Want to use a previously used receiver as is -Want to use a miniature receiver for indoor planes -Want to use an S-FHSS system miniature receiver



# FASSTest 14CH FASSTest 12CH FASST MULTI FASST 7CH S-FHSS

R608FS R6008HS R6108SB R6208SB R6014HS R6014FS R6203SB R6203SBE R6202SBW R6303SB R6303SBE R7008SB R7003SB R617FS R6004FF R616FFM R6106HF R6106HFC R6203SB R6203SBE R6202SBW R6303SB R6303SBE R2006GS R2106GF R2008SB

R7008SB R7003SB

( Usable receivers) -Want to use more channels -Want to use a large number of telemetry functions



### (The time of December, 2012) 

## The example for choosing System Type

# 76 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# FUNCTION *
	!

 
	




## When you select model and wing (swash) types, you will find that the optimized combinations of servo output channels and functions have been already preset. If you would like, you can freely change combinations of servo output channels, functions (aileron, elevator, etc), and control (sticks, switches, and trim levers).

*You can also assign the same function to multiple servo output channels such as assigning elevator function to CH2 and CH3. 

## Channel Replacement

When the channel is replaced in the Function menu, replaced channel uses the setting data (ATV, SUB-TRIM, REVERSE, F/S, and B-F/S, etc.). Servo Output Channels

For FASSTest 14CH mode, you can set 12 linear channels and two digital channels. For FASSTest 12CH mode, you can set 10 linear channels and two digital channels. For FASST MULT mode, you can set 12 linear channels and two digital channels.

Function change 10



!



	

 #  *The function selection screen is displayed. 

### -0


!




#  *The function name blinks. 

### ' # 
 #   
5

 
 	
 7
    
  $
4
"1  *Multiple channels can be assigned to one function. 

## For FASST 7CH mode, you can set only 7 linear channels. For S-FHSS mode, you can set only 8 linear channels.

*DG1/2 (digital channels) These channels can function as switched channels. You can

freely change combinations between servo output channels and input controls (sticks, switches, and trim levers). 

## Motor Function

If you have either a Glider or Airplane Model Type selected, and choose to activate the Motor function, a reverse setting screen is displayed.

*If YES is selected, the output is reversed. If NO is selected, the output is normal.



# Q
# As a safety precaution to prevent the motor

from starting unexpectedly, please switch off the motor accordingly. We also suggest removing the propeller from the motor as an additional precaution.

Operation control change 10


2*#)2
!



	

 #  *The control selection screen is displayed.



### -0


 	
4
#  *The same control can be assigned to multiple channels. (The display screen is an example. The

screen depends on the model type.) 

###  "

 ?8*#<@  
 )	
 !
 




$

 
 	 
#  #!$
! 2*02&*! ! 2",
%2&"
$
! <
$  T1-T4 SET )<I%.,0,8

" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$

# 77 <Functions of Linkage Menu> 2

@@%
\		
#	#
$

&
6[6j
	
 
	 each condition.



###  *! 
40
	$D 	

	$
!

 
$

   2.2&.$!! 2"2&"	






## Trim setting  0


2#<02
!
 
	

 #  *The trim setup screen is displayed.



###  #
	
! 


! 
$

&



## Trim selection  0


!4

4




#  *The setting can be changed.



## Trim rate setting  0
 
   
 ?%#,@ 
!  
# 
 $!
  "

!
 	

  <
&'C  %:!
	
&319C19C

(When the RTN button is touched for one second, the trim rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 
:!
 

!




## Trim mode selection  0


?0+,@
! 
# 
 $!
  "


!!
 	
 
%!!
	
$$
 #
# 	

!
 #
!
$

	 
4
"1 

 ?0@&!!
!!$
 !$
  ?%#)@& %#) $
 !
 05!! 	
 
 
  3 $4 ! 
  
 ! <   $ 





 *[NORMAL]/[REVERSE] selection is possible in "ATL"

mode.



## Throttle trim (helicopter only)

* The throttle trim in conditions other than "Normal" condition can be inhibited. 

###  7
 
  !   


4!


! 

$


# 1


*When "X" is displayed, THR trim is inhibited in conditions other than normal condition.



## Channel replacement  0



¢  
$
   
 #   
$!
  "




¢ 	 

%!!
	
 $$
#
# 
$
 

#
!
$
 
	
4
"1 

# 78 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# SUB-TRIM "
	
$



(The display screen is an example. The

screen depends on the model type.) 

## The Sub-Trim function is used to set the servo neutral position, and may be used to make fine adjustments to the control surface after linkages and pushrods are hooked up. When you begin to set up a model, be sure that the digital trims are set to their center position.

Sub-trim adjustment 10





:
#  
$!
 -%:

 	

  <
&C  %:!
	
&3-;C-;C
$

(When the RTN button is touched for one second, sub-trim is reset to the initial value.) *Before sub-trim adjustment, it is very important to adjust thelinkages at the control surface so that you do not use subtrim, except for very minute adjustments. 

### '#
# 
:!
 

!
 ;
$
$



 "

?"83#<0@
)	
!





$

 
 	
 # 

" 0	 %:	

# 79 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# REVERSE 8









## Servo Reverse changes the direction of an individual servo’s response to a control input.

For CCPM helicopters, be sure to read the section on Swash AFR before reversing any servos. With CCPM helicopters, always complete your servo reversing prior to any other programming. If you use pre-built Airplane/Sailplane functions that control multiple servos, it may be confusing

Servo reversing procedure

*Upon setup completion of a new model, check whether or not each servo is connected to the correct channel. *Next, determine whether you need to reverse any channels by moving each stick and/or other control inputs. 

### 10









#  
$!
 -"



 	



%>!!
	
$$


 ?0@&!  ?,@&



'# 
 #   	
 
 
#
!
$
 
	
4
"1 

*Repeat the operation above for each channel that must be reversed. 

## to tell whether the servo needs to be reversed or a setting in the function needs to be reversed. See the instructions for each specialized function for further details. Always check servo direction prior to every 




 model memory, hook ups, and radio function.

(The display screen is an example. The

screen depends on the model type.) 

### "

?,,",@
)	
!





$

 
 	
 # 

" 0	 "

	!

# 80 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# FAIL SAFE "


$
	$
!
	 	
 








 
	
$

(The display screen is an example. The

screen depends on the model type.) 

## The Failsafe function may be used to set up positions that the servos move to in the case of radio interference.

You may set either of two positions for each channel: Hold, where the servo maintains its last commanded position, or Failsafe, where each servo moves to a predetermined position. You may choose either mode for each channel. ( FASST 7CH mode: CH3 only )

The T14SG system also provides you with an advanced battery monitoring function that warns you when the receiver battery has only a little power remaining. In this case, each servo is moved to the defined failsafe position. ( FASST 7CH mode: CH3 only ) The battery failsafe may be released by operating a predefined control on the transmitter (default is throttle), do not continue to fly, land as soon as possible. Remember, if the

Fail safe setting procedure 1 0
 
   
 2D"2 
!  





# 
$!
 -"


D"!
 	



%>!!
	
$$
 *The display blinks. 

### '#
# #
"1 

$
	 *The channel switches to the F/S mode. 

### ;0


2
"2
!  /

$	4 4
4   
 $   
 
 !



 
#
# 
 
 *The set position is displayed in percentage. *If you want to return that channel to the hold mode, move the cursor to the "F/S" item and touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode. Select the F/S mode by 



 and then change the mode by touching the RTN button. 

## predefined control suddenly moves to a position you did not command, land at once and check your receiver battery. '


 when receiver battery voltage becomes low. 

# Q
# For safety, always set the fail safe functions.
¦\
	

		
 the servo moves to the maximum slow side for airplanes and to the slow side from the hovering position for helicopters. Crashing of the model at full high when normal radio waves cannot be received due to interference, etc., is very dangerous.¦	

	

	!

 be mistaken for an engine malfunction and will be reset at 

	

 any doubts, immediately land.



## Battery fail safe setting procedure  

 



 
!
!



	 $

"



2D"2
!  ?@&

  ?@&

 

## Battery fail safe release switch setting  #
!$



 
  
 4  
 
	
  



 

  
   $  
 


 
	
#
	


 



 

 10


?,),%",D"@
!



$

$	
 -#
# 

*The switch selection screen is called. *For a detailed description of the switch selection and ON/ OFF direction setting method, see [Switch Setting Method] at the back of this manual. 

### "

?%<)"%,@
)	
!





$

 
 	
 # 

" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$

# 81 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# END POINT "


!$





## The End Point function adjusts the left and right servo throws, generates differential throws, and will correct improper linkage settings. The travel rate can be varied from 0% to 140% in each direction on channels 1 to 12(FASSTest 12CH mode). Also, the limit point where servo throw stops may be varied from 0% to 155%.

Servo travel adjustment 10







:
 # 
$!
 -%:

 	

  <
&1CC  %:!
	
&C1;C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value. 

###  #
# 
:!
 

!
 '
$
$







## Limit point adjustment 10


!$



:
 # 
$!
 -%:
!$ 	



  <
&1'9  %:!
	
&C199

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the limit point is reset to the initial value. 

###  #
# 
:!
 

!
 '
$
$


!$  "

 ?,+ 
<#@  
 )	
 !
 




$

 
 	 
#  (The display screen is an example. The screen depends on the model type.)

" 0	 %:	

#
5$

!$ 
 !$ 


# 82 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# SERVO SPEED "

$







## The speed of the servo from 1CH to 12CH of operation can be set up.

It can adjust to 0-27. Speed becomes slow as a numerical value's 0 increases in the state of the fastest of the servo.

* Speed cannot be made quicker than the maximal rate of the

servo to be used.



## Servo speed setting 1#
"$

 




 -8

:!
 :



$

 <
&C %:!
	
&C-E
$

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value. 

### '
$
$



 * It will overlap, if speed control of a S.BUS servo setup is used at the time of S.BUS servo use, and speed changes. Please use one either. * The speed of THR is not set up simultaneously with THR DELAY (model menu : only airplane).



### "

?","
,,+@
)	
!





$

 
 	 
#  (The display screen is an example. The screen depends on the model type.)

" 0	 %:	

#
5$


 $

 $

 


# 83 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# THR CUT "$

	


$

$




## Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop the engine. Generally speaking, modelers will do so
!
 The action is not functional at high throttle to avoid accidental dead stick landings. The switch’s location and direction must be chosen, as it defaults to NULL. Individually adjust the Throttle Cut activation setting for each condition. (helicopter)

Throttle cut setting procedure 1%

&  0


?%*#@
! 
# 
$ !
  "


%*#!
 	


 *The display blinks. 

###  # 
 #   
 
 

!
 -"

&  0


?"7@
!
 
  
$ 

  	 
 # 


 
 *For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch

Setting Method] at the back of this manual. 

### '#
$
	&  0


?
"@
! 
# 
$ !
  %:

$
$
 $
 	

  <
&1E  %:!
	
&C9C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo operation position is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 

!
 *With the selected cut switch ON and the throttle stick at idle; adjust the rate until the engine consistently cuts off. However, be sure that the throttle linkage is not pulled too

tight or unreasonable force is not applied to the servo.



## Designating a Throttle Cut setting position. (helicopter)

*A throttle cut function acts in the low side of the throttle position. *"THRO" setting is common with all condition.



# Q
# Normal setting is slightly above idle. 1#
#
*$4



  

 
 #/ $

	
 

4
$

#  

 *Since conditions are not offered when an Airplane is selected, the Throttle Cut options will vary from the options noted below. *The Throttle Cut POS and SW settings are utilized for all conditions. *If the Throttle Cut switch is activated, or on, this status will continue even if the condition is changed to an inhibited setting. *If the condition is inhibited (INH) the Throttle Cut is off if the SW is in the off position and the throttle stick is low.



### "

?#/*8#@
)	
!





$

 
 	
 # 

*

$

<:
#
* 
	

$
 *$ " 0	 "

	! %:	



### #
 

#
 

#
 $

# 84 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# B9	'QF )


	
	$

$




## The Idle Down function lowers the engine to its idle position. Like Throttle Cut, this is usually
 stick at idle. The action is not functional at high throttle to avoid accidental dead sticks. The switch’s location and direction must be chosen, as it defaults to NULL.

Idle down setting procedure 1%

&  0


?%*#@
! 
# 
$ !
  "


%*#!
 	


 *The display blinks. 

###  # 
 #   
 
 

!


-"

&  0


?"7@
!
 

$

 	
# "



 *For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch

Setting Method] at the back of this manual.



### '


	&  0


?",#@
! 
# 
 $!
  %: 
 
 
 
  
  $
 	

  <
&C  %:!
	
&31CCC1CC * When a minus rate is input, an offset is applied at the high side. *Maximum offset amount is near maximum slow. * When the RTN button is touched for one second, the offset rate is reset to the initial value. 

###  #
# 

:!
 

!
 "

?<+),+7@
)	
!





$

 
 	 
# 

" 0	 "

	! %:	



### *

$

# 85 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# Q=	(BF,

Swash ring setting procedure 1%

&  0


?%*#@
! 
# 
$ !
  "


%*#!
 	


 *The display blinks. 

###  # 
 #   
 
 

!


-

	&  0


?%#,@
!
 # 
$!
  "


 	

  <
&1CC  %:!
	
&9C-CC

*Adjust the rate to maximum swash tilt. *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value. 

###  #
# 
:!
 

!
 )!
$

>5
	
/
$




## This function limits the swash travel to a fixed range in order to prevent damaging the swash linkage by simultaneous operation of the ailerons and elevators. It is very useful in 3D aerobatics which use a large travel.

 #
$
		
$
&  #
 
 
  
 
 
 #
  



  #
 !
  
 $ "

?"7%"/<.@
)	


!



$

  
 	
#  7

	
4  
  $
  
 $
	 	
$


$ 5 $
"$
!
 




" 0	 "

	! %:	

# 86 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# Q= "%	


$
4
5
$ $
/31



## Neutral Point

At your linkages, if the servo horn deviates from a perpendicular position at neutral, the linkage compensation functions in this menu may not compensate effectively. To correct this use the Neutral Point function. This will move the neutral point of the servos to the actual perpendicular position. However, this adjustment changes only the axis point of the compensation functions in this menu, and does not affect the neutral position of other functions.
Swash AFR Swash AFR function reduces, increases, or reverses the rate (travel) of the aileron, elevator and collective pitch functions, by adjusting or reversing the motion of all servos involved in that function, only when using that function. Mixing RateThis mixing is used to compensate the swashplate as necessary during specific control inputs.

Neutral point setting procedure The neutral point becomes the correction standard point.

*Adjusting the servo horn so that the neutral point is near the

50% position makes the mixing amount small. 

### 1
$
  0


?
"@
! 
$$


 		

	
# 
# 

#
 


6
$

 %
 
	 
 
 $4 
 
 

!

 :!
 

## The following compensation mixing is possible; PIT to AIL, PIT to ELE, AIL to PIT, ELE to AIL,and ELE to PIT (HR3 mode.) It adjusts the swashplate to for proper operation of each control using the corresponding compensation mixing. Linkage Compensation This compensation mixing is used to correct the swash-plate for pitch control at low pitch and high pitch. Speed Compensation

This function is used to cancel the reaction that is generated by the difference in the movements of each servo when the swash-plate moves.
Subtrim Subtrim for aileron, elevator and pitch can be set during swash setting. Pitch adjustment function



8
 used while adjusting the pitch.

Swash AFR setting procedure

The swash AFR function makes adjustments so


¤J¥ [ELE], and [PIT] operation. 10




:
#  
$!
 -%:
%
 	



  <
&9C  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the AFR rate is reset to the initial value. 

###  #
# 
:!
 

!
 "

?"7%"/@
)	
!





$

 
 	
 # 

" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$

# 87 <Functions of Linkage Menu> Mixing rate setting procedure The HR3 swash-plate type will be used as an example to describe mixing rate setting. The mixing used in other swash modes may be different, however, the setting procedure is the same.

*Set the throttle stick to the preset neutral point. Adjust the length of the linkage rod so that the swash plate is horizontal at this position. *The sub-trim function can be used to make small adjustments. *Adjust so that the pitch curve is a straight line and the helicopter achieves maximum pitch. *Move the cursor to the item you want to adjust and touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and return to the cursor mode.



### 1%:	

$
?%<)
<#@  %:
%<)
<#


 	 


$!
!


 
!


	 *Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor. *The left and right sides can be adjusted individually. 

### -%:	


$
?,),%<)@D ?,),
<#@  %:
,),%<),),
<#
 

 	

$ !
!




!
 $ *Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor. *The up and down sides can be adjusted individually. 

### '%:	
$$
?
<#%<)@?
<#

,),@  %:

<#%<)
<#,),
 
$
!



D $


 !
!5!!	 *Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor. *The slow and high sides can be adjusted individually.



## Linkage compensation setting procedure

*Prior to utilizing the linkage compensation settings, it is important to adjust the mixing rate settings. *Linkage compensation overrides interference from the aileron operation with the elevator or elevator operation with the aileron at collective pitch control for low pitch and high pitch. *When making the following setting, Move the cursor to the item you want to set and touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode. Touch the RTN button to end adjustment and return to the cursor mode.



### 1*!$
	
$?%<)@  "




$0
 



	 :

!$
! 






$ 
!! *Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor. *The left and right sides can be adjusted individually. *If the interference increases when the compensation amount was increased, make adjustments with the direction [DIR.] using the plus "+" or minus "-". 

### -*!$
	

$?,),@  %:


!$
!   
 
  $ 
 







 !
$!! '
$

$1- 
4$
!
 

!$
! 




## Speed compensation setting procedure 10
 
   
 2"
,,+2 
! 


# 
 $!
 -"
 
 
   
 
 $ $!



 : 
 $

 !$
 ! ?"
,,+@!!!




$ 
 *Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor. 

###  #
# 
:!
 

!


# 88 <Functions of Linkage Menu> Subtrim setting procedure Subtrim can be set on the last page of the swash setting screen.

*The sub-trim value set here is reflected at sub-trim of the linkage menu.



## Pitch adjustment procedure

The pitch adjustment function can be used on the last page of the swash setting screen. 1* 
  $	
  
  
	



 -7
 
   !
   $ :!
   
 #   
4

$	$$ * In the pitch adjustment mode an * is displayed at the left

side of the current output setting button. *If the cursor is moved to another button and the RTN button is touched during pitch adjustment, the pitch adjustment mode is deactivated.



###  

&   /	 /	$>5
$! 
 
$>5
$! ) )$>5
$! 0	 *$$! *The cyclic pitch speed can be set with the button at the right

side of the “Moving” button. 

###  "
		
&11CC

*When the set value is large, motion becomes fast and when the set value is small, motion becomes slow.

# 89 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# T1-T4 SET. +	!
	



## This function adjusts the digital trim's step 

#7,70$

When the flight conditions are set, the trim operation can be coupled with the conditions when combination mode is selected.

The T14SG unit of trim is displayed on the home

screen.

Control step amount setting 10


?"#,
@
!


# 
$ !
 -"


$! 	
 
  <
&;  %:!
	
&C-CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the control

step amount is reset to the initial value. *When the value is increased, the change per step becomes larger. 

### '#
# 
:!
 

!
 

## Separate/combination mode selection (Heli and Glider only) 10


?0+,@
!


# 
 $!
 -"

 
 !
  	 
 


%>!!
	
$$
 *The display blinks. 

###  ?*0@&*! !
#
!6 
H

H	  ?",
%@&"
$
!
#!:!
 
 !
   
 	  '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  

## Display unit selection 10
 
   
 ?8<#@ 
! 


# 
 $!
 -"

 
 !
  	 
 


%>!!
	
$$
 *The display blinks. 

###  ?33@&%
$! 
$

!
 

#

$  ?@&22$
 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  

## Trim Memory Operation procedure 10


?#13#;0,0A@
!


# 
 $!
 -"


%*#!
 	



%>!!
	
$$
  ?</@&< 
  ?%*#@&%
 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  ;%
!


4!


 !	

# 

#
!$!
 


$ *When the function is inhibited, the trim position returns to the actual trim position. 

## Only the trim displayed on the home screen can be moved to the center position without changing the actual trim's memory position.

"

?#13#;",#@
)	
!





$

 
 	
 # 

(The display screen is an example. The screen depends on the model type.) 

### #!$
! 2*02&*! ! 2",
%2&"
$
!

" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



### *The display blinks.

# 90 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# Q(FBF, )
!	

7	!





## The T14SG includes an audible alarm that sounds when the transmitter’s battery voltage drops below a pre-determined setting; adjustable for cell types and voltages.

Mixing warning at power ON can be reset to OFF.

Accessing and Activating the Low Battery Alarm 1#
 ) 
 )7 %##,A !

	
  

 	 
 #1;".  "
!0
7
"
!0
4
 
"
#		
"8+ $  
 $
 
 
 # >!


 -8
 
 "
#    
 ) 
)7%##,A!4
$
 

# 

	
 
	8	
"
#4:
 	


D

!
  
!
 
$ 
	
 #
	
$	
!9CFC "		

	

	
&

5-Cell NiCd or NiMH: 5.6V
2-Cell LiFe: 6.0V 

## Q
#	
	

#	
" 10



!




#  
$!
 -"


!
 	



 *The display blinks. 

### '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  

## Q
#	
Z %$
& #
 D<
 D#
 $D"$3D0$D% 
D 0 /
$
& *D#
 D#


$D#
/ .
&*D0$D#!3!5D0

 "

 ?7%<.@  
 )	
 !
 




$

 
 	 
# 


 S1  

5$	
 " 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



### *About low battery voltage, all the models included in one transmitter are changed in common. It cannot set to different voltage for every model. Moreover, data reset is not carried out.

# 91 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# TELEMETRY +$	!



 

## This screen displays your choice of data from the receiver.

Also warnings can be activated regarding other data from your aircraft. For example, if the receiver voltage drops, the user can be warned by an alarm (and vibration). *It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode. *Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in FASSTest12CH mode. *The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.



###  "

 ?#,),0,#A@  
 )	
 !
 




$

 
 	 
# 


 S1  

5$	
  [TELEMETRY]  


 HOME/EXIT  

$
! home screen



" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### 


3£#!
#




$
	



## How to see telemetry date 1#

!


 


/0,D

,<# $
!
!


 

?#,),0,#A@
)	
!
 


$

 	 
#  -<

!

#  $
4!
$ 
$
!
  
 !!!D!5!! 
  !

 *Receiver voltage can be checked immediately. An optional

sensor will need to be attached to S.BUS2 of a receiver if you would like to see other information. 

### *No special setup is necessary if each sensor displayed is left as in the default setup. Separate sensor ID is also unnecessary. However, if two or more of one kind of sensor is used, setup is required in the "SENSOR" menu. 

# Q
# Do not watch the transmitter screen during 
~

	

	
 extremely dangerous. Have an assistant on hand to check the screen for you. A pilot should NEVER take his eyes off his aircraft.

# 92 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# TELEMETRY : Rx-BATT. +$	!



 




## In this screen, the battery voltage of a receiver is displayed.

If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an alarm and/or vibration will alert you. *It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode. *Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in FASSTest12CH mode. *The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.



### "

?53%##@
#,),0,#A






$

 
 	 
# 

" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### 


 
	
 #
!5!!
!!!


$
	


  ¤ #  
  2     2           


   !   
 
 	
 $ 


	



## Alert set 10


¤%),#?</@
!


# 
 $!
 -"


%*#!
 	



 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  ;0


¤#/,"/)+?;C@ 
!
#  
$!
 9%:

 	

  <
&;C  %:!
	
&CCB; *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is

reset to the initial value. 

### F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1  TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4 

# "Vibes" type If the following types are selected, the transmitter will vibrate during the warning.

# 93 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# TELEMETRY : EXT-VOLT +$	!
,# 
	
$



## The EXT-VOLT screen will display the data from the EXT-battery output from the R7008SB receiver. In order to use this function, it is necessary to connect External voltage connector of the R7008SB receiver to a CA-RVIN-700 (FUTM5551) or SBS-01V to the battery you desire to measure the voltage of. You will be alerted by an alarm or vibration if the voltage set by you is exceeded.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode. *Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage will be received in the FASSTest12CH mode. *The FASSTest14CH mode will display all telemetry data.



### "

?,#3)#@
#,),0,#A






$

 
 	 
# 

" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### ,# 
	
 #
!5!!
!!!


$
	


¤#



!
 
	
$ 
 

	



## Alert set 10


¤%),#?</@
!


# 
 $!
 -"


%*#!
 	



 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  ;0


¤#/,"/)+?;C@ 
!
#  
$!
 9%:

 	

  <
&;C  %:!
	
&CC1CCC *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is

reset to the initial value. 

### F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1  TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4 

# "Vibes" type If the following types are selected, the transmitter will vibrate during the warning. 

## *CA-RVIN-700 or SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.

# 94 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# TELEMETRY : TEMP. +$	!

!$




## TEMP. is a screen which displays/sets up the temperature information from an optional temperature sensor. The temperature of the model (engine, motor,

$



 If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an alarm and/or vibration will alert you. *It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode. *Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in FASSTest12CH mode. *The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.



### "

?#,0
@
#,),0,#A






$

 
 	
 # 



 S1  


5$	
 " 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### #
!$
 #
!5!!
!!!


$
	


 ¤ %  

!   
 
  
 ! $ 
      
     $  


 ¥%$

   !   
 
 
!$


 
 






## Alert set : Hot warning 10
 
   
 ¥%),# 
! 


# 
 $!
 -"


%*#!
 	



 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  ;0


¥#/,"/)+?1CC °C @ 
!
#  
$!
 9%:

 	

  <
&1CC °C  %:!
	
&1 °C -CC °C ¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+ *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is

reset to the initial value. 

### F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1  

## Alert set : Low-temperature warning 1-D-$	


 $	"10




¤%),#
!
 # 
$!
 -"


%*#!
 	



 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  ;0


¤#/,"/)+?C °C @ 
!
#  
$!
 9%:

 	

  <
&C °C  %:!
	
&C °C 1GG °C ¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+ *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is

reset to the initial value. 

### F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1  TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4 

### "Vibes" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter will vibrate during the warning. 

## *A temperature sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

# 95 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# TELEMETRY : RPM +$	!

0



## RPM is a screen which displays / sets up the RPM information from an optional RPM sensor. The RPM of the model (engine, motor, etc.)

 If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an alarm and/or vibration will alert you. *It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode. *Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in FASSTest12CH mode. *The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.



### "

?
0@
#,),0,#A






$

  	
# 



 S1  


5$	
 " 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### 
0 #
!5!!
!!!


$
	


20%.,#<*22
#<*%)2


	
 

 ""3C10&0%.,#<* ""3C1&
#<*%) ¤%


  
     !            


0 


  ¥% $ 


  
     !            
 
 
0 
  







## Alert set : Over rotations 10
 
   
 ¥%),# 
! 


# 
 $!
 -"


%*#!
 	



 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  ;0
 
   
 ¥#/,"/)+ ?-CCC$!@
!
#  
$!
 9%:

 	

  <
&-CCC$!  %:!
	
&1$!19C4CCC$! ¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+ *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is

reset to the initial value. 

### F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1  

## Alert set : Under rotations 1"

$	
 $	"1

0
 
   
 ¤%),# 
!  
# 
 $!
 -"


%*#!
 	



 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  ;0


¤#/,"/)+?C$!@ 
!
#  
$!
 9%:

 	

  <
&C$!  %:!
	
&C$!1;G4GGG$! ¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+ *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is

reset to the initial value. 

### F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1  TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4 

### "Vibes" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter will vibrate during the warning.



###  < 20%.,#<*24 
 	
 


	
!
 	


 <2
#<*%)24
! 
 

$$

 !



 

## *A RPM sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

# 96 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# TELEMETRY : ALTITUDE +$	!


ALTITUDE is a screen which displays / sets up the altitude information from an optional altitude sensor or 3+%7
	

 be known. If it becomes higher (low) than preset altitude, you can be told by alarm. To show warning by vibration can also be chosen. Data when a power supply is turned on shall be 0 m, and it displays the altitude which 
	_	
	

 high, that shall be 0 m and the altitude difference from an airfield is displayed. This sensor calculates the altitude from atmospheric pressure. Atmospheric pressure will get lower as you go up in altitude, using this the sensor will estimate the altitude. Please understand that an exact advanced display cannot be performed if atmospheric pressure changes in a weather situation.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode. *Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in FASSTest12CH mode. *The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.
"

?%)#<#8+,@
#,),0,#A






$

 
 	
# 

" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### %  #
 !5!!  
 !!! 


$
	




### ¤%


 
 ! 

        
   
    
  

   ¥  %    $          



! 


 

 

 




## First, the set of a reference is required. 1#
 !
  !
   








 -0


?",#@2,,,*,2 
!
#  
$!
 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  *Atmospheric pressure is changed according to the weather also



~	
 

## Alert set : High side 10
 
   
 ¥%),# 
! 


# 
 $!
 -"


%*#!
 	



 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  ;0


¥#/,"/)+?-CC!@ 
!
#  
$!
 9%:

 	

  <
&-CC!  %:!
	
&3;GG!94CCC! ¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+ *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value. 

### F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1 


## Alert set : Low side 1"

$	
 $	"10




¤%),#
!
 # 
$!
 -"


%*#!
 	



 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  ;0


¤#/,"/)+?39C!@ 
!
#  
$!
 9%:

 	

  <
&39C!  %:!
	
&39CC!;4GGG! ¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+ *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is

reset to the initial value. 

### F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1  TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4 

### "Vibes" type If the following types are selected, the transmitter will vibrate during the warning. 

## *An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the airc raft.




"1 


5$	


# 97 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# TELEMETRY : VARIO +$	!
!





## VARIO is a screen which displays / sets up the variometer information from an optional altitude sensor or GPS sensor.

7
	

 be known. If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an alarm and/or vibration will alert you.

To ensure that the pilot is aware as to the model's status, the T14SG incorporates a different melody for ascent and descent. Additionally, depending upon the rate of climb or descent, the tones vary to indicate whether or not the airplane is climbing or descending at a rapid rate.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode. *Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in FASSTest12CH mode. *The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

"

?%<@
#,),0,#A






$

 
 	
# 
" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### !

  #
 !5!!  
 !!! 


$
	


<
%*#4!
 

	




4
$
	

  ¤ %  



! 


 

 

 
   ¥  %    $          



! 


 

 

 




## Alert set : Rise side 10
 
   
 ¥%),# 
! 


# 
 $!
 -"


%*#!
 	



 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  ;0


¥#/,"/)+?C!D@ 
!
#  
$!
 9%:

 	

  <
&C!D  %:!
	
&3;G!D9C!D ¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+ *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is

reset to the initial value. 

### F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1  

## Alert set : Dive side 1"

$	
 $	"1

0
 
   
 ¤%),# 
!  
# 
 $!
 -"


%*#!
 	



 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  ;0


¤#/,"/)+?C!D@ 
!
#  
$!
 9%:

 	

  <
&C!D  %:!
	
&39C!D;G! ¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+ *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is

reset to the initial value. 

### F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1  TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4 

### "Vibes" type 

## *An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the airc raft.

If the following types are selected, the transmitter will vibrate during the warning. 

### 


"1 


5$	


# 98 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# TELEMETRY : BATTERY +$	!
 




## In this screen, the battery voltage is displayed. In order to use this function, it is necessary to connect External voltage connector of R7008SB ⇔ SBS-01V ⇔ Battery

SBS-01V measures two batteries. The drivebattery connected to two lines is displayed on EXTVOLT. The battery for receivers connected to 3P lines is displayed here. *It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode. *Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in FASSTest12CH mode. *The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.



### "

?%##,A@
#,),0,#A






$

 
 	 
# 

" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

###  
	
 #
!5!!
!!!


$
	


¤#



!
 
	
$ 
 

	



## Alert set 10


¤%),#?</@
!


# 
 $!
 -"


%*#!
 	



 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  ;0


¤#/,"/)+?;C@ 
!
#  
$!
 9%:

 	

  <
&;C  %:!
	
&CCB; *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is

reset to the initial value. 

### F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1  TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4 

# "Vibes" type If the following types are selected, the transmitter will vibrate during the warning.



## *SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.

# 99 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# TELEMETRY : DISTANCE +$	!




## Distance is a screen that displays and sets the altitude data from an SBS-01G (GPS Sensor) sold separately. The distance to the airborne aircraft can be read by the transmitter. When the aircraft #$

 alerted by an alarm and vibration. *The GPS sensor sold separately is necessary. Mount and connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor instruction manual. *It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode. *Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in FASSTest12CH mode. *The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

"

?+<"#%*,@
#,),0,#A






$

 
 	
# 
" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### *


+
!
		


1! ~ 94CCC! *Alarm when the aircraft moves far

away. ¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+

+
!
		
C! ~ ;4GGG! ¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+  05!! 
 
 !



 #
 ¤ 

            !     
    
     
  
 
 $ 


  #
 ¥ 

            !    

 
   
   
       
    5






## First, the set of a reference is required. 1#
!
!

.
"






 -<
.
"

	

$


 
!


 '0


?",#@2,,,*,2


!
#  
$!
 ;#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  *Now, the position of the present model was set to 0 m. 

## Alert setting when aircraft goes too far 10
 
   
 ¥%),# 
! 


# 
 $!
 -"


%*#!
 	



 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  ;0


¤#/,"/)+?14CCC!@ 
!
#  
$!
 9%:

 	

 *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is

reset to the initial value. 

### F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1  TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4 

### "Vibes" type 

## *A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

If the following types are selected, the transmitter will vibrate during the warning. 

### 

 S1  


5$	
 

# *

* <


	!.
"

"




 
!
' $4$?,,,*,@

# 100 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# *

Surface Altitude Slant %
 
 


	    
 

 
!$  



 'D' 

## Alert setting when the aircraft approaches 1%
 
 
 $	
  $	 "1

0
 
   
 ¤%),# 
!  
# 
 $!
 -"


%*#!
 	



 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  ;0

 
¤#/,"/)+?C!@
! 
# 
 $!
 9%:

 	

 *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is

reset to the initial value. 

### F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1 "

"

?+<"#%*,@
#,),0,#A

 	


 RTN  % S1  





## Two displays methods, straight line distance and surface distance, can be selected as shown above. 1"

$	
' 	
"1 


!
¦+<"#%*,§

 -"

 ̈")%#£ ̈"8%*,£
5¦0+,§4




!

 # 

# 101 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# TELEMETRY : SPEED +$	!
$





## The speed screen displays and sets the speed data from an SBS-01G (GPS sensor) sold separately.

The speed of the aircraft during flight can be displayed.

After flight, the maximum speed during flight can be viewed. Because this speed is based on position data from a GPS satellite, the ground speed is displayed instead of air speed. Consequently, with a head wind, the displayed speed decreases and with a tail wind, the displayed speed increases.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode. *Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in FASSTest12CH mode. *The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

"

?"
,,+@
#,),0,#A






$

 
 	
# 

" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### +$

$

 +$
!5!!$





!



"$

!
		
 1 ~ 9CC!D ¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+ *Alarm when the speed has increased.



### "$

!
		
C ~ ;GG!D ¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+ *Alarm when the speed has decreased.  #
 ¤  

  !  

 
 
 $

 $ 


 #
¥

  !  

 
 
$


5

 






## Alert setting when speed increases 1"
¦¥%),#§
 ̈"
,,+£

%*#

0

</
#  -"


%*#!
 	



 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  ;#
$

!	


 
 

	
$

$
5¦¥ #/,"/)+§	
# # 

!

$



 9%:

 	

 *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset

to the initial value. 

### F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1  

## Alert setting when speed decreases 1"

$	
- $
	"1!
 ̈"
,,+£




¦¤%),#§%*# -"


%*#!
 	
 
 '#
# #
!

$ 

	
4
"1  ;#
 $

   ! 	


  

 

	
!
$ 
5¦¤#/,"/)+§	
# #!

$

 


 9%:

 	

 *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset

to the initial value. 

### F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1  *Speed alarm precaution

Since the GPS speed sensor displays the ground speed, it cannot be used as a stall alarm. For example, an aircraft that stalls at 50km/h will stall if the tailwind is 5km/h or greater even through 55km/h is displayed by ground speed. In addition, 


	


0BB!6
 an over-speed alarm, when the headwind reaches 30km/h the airplane will disintegrate in midair due to over speeding even at a ground speed of 370km/h. 

## *A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4 

### "Vibes" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter will vibrate during the warning. 

### 


"1 


5$	


# 102 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# SENSOR 

!






## This screen registers the telemetry sensors used with the transmitter. When only one of a certain type of sensor is used, this setting is unnecessary and the sensor can be used by simply connecting it to the S.BUS2 port of the transmitter.

When using 2 or more of the same kind of sensor, they must be registered here.

"

?","@
)	
!





$ 

 
  	
# 

 "
 <+& 7
 !$
 
  
 !
$


4<+



%
 
 
4!


=
'	

.
"

=
B	<4

.
" ""3C1.
B41F4-;4FE
 




## < Assignable slot > *Altimeter, GPS, and other sensors that display a large amount of data require multiple slots. *Depending on the type of sensor, the slot numbers that can be allocated may be limited. 

## Q"
		
	 Servos are classified by CH, but sensors are classified in units called “slot” . There are slots from No. 1 to No. 31

.

Altitude sensors, GPS sensors and other data sensor units may use multiple slots

.

Using a sensor which uses two or more slots, the required number of slots is automatically assigned by setting up a start slot

.

When 2 or more of the same kind of sensor are used, the sensors themselves must allocate unused slots and memorize that slot.

*3 slots of altitude sensor are used. *8 slots of GPS sensor are used.

3ENSOR 4HEREQUIRED NUMBEROFSLOTS 4HENUMBERWHICHCANBEUSEDASASTARTSLOT 3ELLINGAREA 4%-03"3
4	 SLOT  ~ 

'LOBAL 20-3"32-3"3 2/ SLOT  ~ 
6OLTAGE3"3
6	 SLOTS   !LTITUDE3"3
!	 SLOTS   '033"3
'	 SLOTS  4%-0
& SLOT  ~ 
%UROPE

6!2)/
& SLOTS  
6!2)/
& SLOTS   '03
& SLOTS  

###   
  
 
  !

 
=
 '

# 103 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

### *$	
E 	
"1 F!
!


?","@!
 

# SENSOR : RELOAD

SENSOR : REGISTER This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the s ame type.

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the s ame type. 

## When using multiple sensors of the same type the sensors must be registered in the transmitter. Connect all the sensors to be used to the T14SG as

 the following procedure. The ID of each sensor is registered in the transmitter.

This function registers an additional sensor. Connect the sensor as shown in the figure at the right and register it by the following procedure. The sensor ID is registered in the transmitter. All the sensors to be used are connected.SENSORSENSOR 3-way hub or Y-harnesses

5HFHLYHUV %DWWHU\ 76*SENSORSENSORSENSOR

3-way hub or Y-harnesses

5HFHLYHUV %DWWHU\ 76*SENSOR 

## Reading all the sensors to be used 1 *
  
 
  






 


#1;".	  
>	
 
 -0

¦,)+§$	
E 
?","@

 '#
#  %



	

 
 




## Additional sensor registration 1*





 


 


#1;".	  
>	

	 -0

¦,.<"#,§$	
E 
 ̈"
£

 '#
#  #


	

 



* When the number of slots needed in registration is

	





 performed. Disable unused slots or perform the following relocate.

# 104 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

## This function secures contiguous unused slots by rearranging the registration state when sensor registration and deregistration are performed repeatedly and the unused slots are fragmented.

Relocate of sensors to be used 1 *
  
 
  






 


#1;".	  
>	
 
 -0

¦,)*%#,§$	
E 
?","@

 '#
# 



## This procedure changes the slot No. of one registered sensor. Sensor slot change 1*





 


	

#1;".	  
>	
 
 -0

¦",#")#§$	
E 
 ̈"
£

 '#
# %



 $$
 ;0

¦)%+§
 #  9#

$
0

 
! 

 	




 ( * 
 
 



  
$	
 ) F0

¦7<#,§
 #  All the sensors to be used are connected.SENSORSENSOR 3-way hub or Y-harnesses

5HFHLYHUV %DWWHU\ 76*SENSORSENSORSENSOR 

# SENSOR : RELOCATE

SENSOR : SET SLOT

3-way hub or Y-harnesses

5HFHLYHUV %DWWHU\ 76*SENSOR 

### This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the s ame type.

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the s ame type. 

### *$	
E 	
"1 F!
!


?","@!


# 105 <Functions of Linkage Menu> "


!




)	
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT          $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# DATA RESET 0
!
!
	

 

## This function is designed to allow you to reset trim settings or all of the settings saved in the active model memory. You may individually choose to reset the following data;
T1~T4:

Reset the digital trim setting. *The trim step amount and trim rate are not reset.



## Data resetting method 10



!




#  



 

### -,5



 	
#  

#
"1 

 

	

 ?#13#;@&


#13#;  ?%))0+,)",##<.@&


  
 )	
 !
  0
 !
 5
$

=
4!


4 !
$
 ?# ,),0,#A@& 

  
 

!
  

## All model setting: Resets all Linkage and Model Menu functions except for Frequency, Model Select, Low battery voltage, and Model Type.

* If the Model Type selected is Glider, the motor function

channel is automatically reversed in the Reverse menu; all other channels remain normal.


## TELEMETRY:

Reset the telemetry setting. "

?+%#%,",#@
)	
!





$

 
 	 
# 

" 0	

# 106 <Model Menu (Common Functions)> 

# MODEL MENU (COMMON FUNCTIONS)

This section describes the D/R, program mixing, and other functions common to all model types.

Before setting the model data, use the Model Type function of the Linkage menu to select the model type matched to the aircraft. If a different model type is selected afterwards, the D/R, program mixing, and other parameters are reset. If either a helicopter or glider have been selected 
	[
	
	 you want to switch the settings for each condition by switch, stick position, etc., use the Condition %	
#^ conditions can be used) Note: The T14SG is designed so that the airplane

and glider (including EP glider) model types are compatible with aircraft of similar type wings. This section outlines the relationship between the functions common to airplanes and gliders, except some dedicated functions, and model type. The setting menus will depend on the number of servos and other differences according to the wing type used. The setup screens in the instruction manual are typical examples.

*The Model menu screen depends on the model type.



# Model Menu functions (Common) list

(?'

%


#
 description of its functions, see the Linkage Menu section.)2'FB7B'F	


		"

 #
	

$

  
  
 condition renaming, and condition delay can be set.
)9	(7

The D/R curve of a T14SG transmitter may be 
	
! information on how to do so, please refer to the Switch Setting Method located at the back of this manual.
(',E	BA

The T14SG transmitter allows up to five completely customizable program mixes. %

!
!
 
 

	
0+) 

!
 

4


* "

 
 

!
  
  
 0
 !
  	 RTN   HOME/ EXIT $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>



###  "

 
     
 




$

 	
#  " 0	

#
5$ RETURN

# 107 <Model Menu (Common Functions)> "


!




0
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT         $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# CONDITION 	 6  	!
4 $4 $ 	
  
 

?
5
$$
$
@ 

## This function, in the Model menu, can be used 	q Please note this is not applicable to airplane type selections. Note: To prevent accidental activation of any


	



 switch setting of those unused conditions to null [--].  % * +
   
 


8


	
!! 
 






	
 

$



 
$
	!
 


 
 	  	 #
 
 





 !5!!$
!
! 7

	

$
> H	4


	
 
  
 
$	  
 
 !  < !$
  

 
4 


$
$! 
!
 



#&

$ 

###  "

 ?*+<#<@  
 0
 !
 




$

 
 	 
# 

 "


$
  	

#
4
 #  *The current condition can not be selected for the copy destination condition. 

### '0
 
   
 ?*
A@ 
! 

 
 #  % ! !
	
$$
 *The display blinks. 

### ;#
# 

 
 $	  !$

 # 
 "1 $$	



## 	"
# 10


$$3

3	
 
#   #
$

$	 	
#
 
!

 	
$ *The Normal condition cannot be changed or moved, its priority is always the lowest. 

## 2	!"	

@

 10



!




D


 


$

 	 
# 


 
 

	¤%

Setting Method] at the back of this manual.



## 2	

#%
@$ 

### 10


?"8*,@
!


# 
 $!
  "


$
 	 

#
4
#  -0


?+,"#<@
! 
#  " 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



### #&
$ #&$

# 108 <Model Menu (Common Functions)> 2	

	
#

#%
D$ 

### 1"



 -0


2+,)%A2
 


# 
$!
  %:

! 	
 
  <
&C  %:!
	
&C-E!5!!
 '#
# 
:!
 

!


# 109 <Model Menu (Common Functions)> "


!




0
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT         $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# )9	(7 #
	


 

?%!
$
@



## Dual rate function is used to adjust the amount of throw and the operational curve of the stick #


$	
 q
	
	




( operational curve of the throttle function.

This is normally used after the End Point programming has been completed to define the maximum throw. When mixing is applied from one channel to another channel, both channels can be adjusted at the same time by adjusting the operation rate through the dual rate function. Neutral position of the dual rate curve can be set.

'

	J+J+@j^77_\J~&[j_\	
#
6 Glider)

J+@
j^77_\J~

	  _  ̈ +  
                   
                J  + J+@j^77_\J~
&[j_\	 
 J+J+@  j^77_\J~ &[j_\ 	 #& switching only) 

### "

?+8%)%#,@
0
!





$

 
 	
 # 

#&
3$ 

### 
$ " 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### )
D	$D $


D	4$D

"

 ?%$
@

?/
$
D	
@

*0
 



"!
 

 *



"

 ^
	
	 

### 



# 110 <Model Menu (Common Functions)> 
	

	
#	
 1

  0




 
!
#  
$!
  "


:  	

  #
# 
!
 -"

  0


¢
! 


$

 	 
# "


 !
  
  $  $$ 
 

	¤%

Setting Method] at the back of this manual. 

### ')
D	$D
:!


+	
	
3 condition you want to adjust. 

###  0




! :
#  
$!
  %:

 	

  <
&1CC  %:!
	
&C1;C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo operation position is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 

!
  
$
$


 


 ;$

,

:!


+	
	
3 condition you want to adjust. 

###  0


,

! :
#  
$!
  %:

 	

  <
&C  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo operation position is reset to the initial value.) ^_ ̈+			 control inputs around center to avoid over-controlling the model. This is often used for the ailerons, elevator and rudder and may be used with the throttle in the case of an airplane selection to smoothe the engine controls as well. 

###  #
# 
:!
 

!
  
$
$



 

 9
$:!
+	
	
3 condition you want to adjust. 

###  0


?#@
! 
# 
$ !
  %:

 	

  <
&C  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the neutral position is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 
!


# 111 <Model Menu (Common Functions)> "


!




0
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT         $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# (',E	BA 	!!5	 


!
8$
!5	  


!
?%!
$
@ 

## Programmable mixing may be used to correct undesired tendencies of the aircraft, and it may also be 	

[8
 that the motion of a command channel, called the "master," is added to the motion of the mixed channel, called "slave."

~


[

 %

#£7£$78 #J
6q5$

~

 [8=E6=


 have mixing remaining on all the time. The Programmable mixing includes a powerful link function, which allows Programmable mixing to be linked with the special mixing functions, or with other programmable mixing functions. The link function can be set up for Master and Slave channel individually.
"

?
.0<@
0
!





$

 
 	
 # 

)
 #!!

 D " 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



## 	
	

	
  0


!5¢






$

 	
# 

?)

@ ?93$
@

*
!5

0
*/ "
*/ "

 *


 *


 

4A 05	
)
D	4$D



$139 05¢



## #E		
#	



	"
	E  0


?%*#@
! 
# 
$ !
  "


%*#!
 	


 *The display blinks. 

###  # 
 #   
 
 

!
 7	

#=E=

$ =E6=
8

 function is activated.

# 112 <Model Menu (Common Functions)>'F@'&&	!"	
#  0
 
   
  
!  


$

 	 
# 


 
 

	¤%

Setting Method] at the back of this manual. 

¤55¥

## 

	"

	
# 10


?0%"#,@
!


# 
 $!
  "


 	


 *The display blinks. 

###  #
# 	

 

!
 -7
!5	
 !5
4!

 
?)<I@
! 
# 
 $!
  "

 
  !
4 

 ?@  ?3@4  	

 *The display blinks. 

###  #
# 

!
 

!
 *Check to ensure that the link mode is functioning properly by operating the mix accordingly. *Master channel control can be set to activate based on the amount of stick input, or VR input, neither of which include 7'6\
8
 setup screen is displayed by touching the RTN button with "H/W" selected in the function selection. Select master 
#7
£6<£¤55¥


\7E

## 

	"

	
# 10


?")%,@
!


# 
 $!
  "


 	


 *The display blinks. 

###  #
# 	

 

!
 -7
!5	
 !5
4!

 
?)<I@
! 
# 
 $!
  "


!
?@?3@ 	 

 *The display blinks. 

###  #
# 

!
 

!
 *Check the direction by actual operation. 

## 7	
	'F@'&&	
# 17
		
!!
4!




?#<0@
!
# 
$!
  "

D 	



*The display blinks. 

###  #
# 	

! !
 D  
  
  !
 7
8	
¤=E¥ 	¤=¥ *Effective when a function is set in the master channel.

## 9

	
	
# ?

	@ 10


!5	

	


!
#  
$!
  %:

 	

  <
&C  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo operation position is reset to the initial value. 

###  #
# 
:!
 

!
 -
$
$



 

 ?
	






@ 10


?"@
	
!


# 
 $!
  %:


 	


  <
&C  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo operation position is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 

!
 -
$
$






## ;	
	
# ?

	@ 10


$

	
!

:
#  
$!
  %:

 	

  <
&C  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo operation position is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 

!
 -
$
  $

  
 $  



# 113 <Model Menu (Common Functions)> "


!




0
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT         $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# &)9	BA +

!5	
:

!5
$$ 
 	
?%$
D
$
@ 

## 7	Y adjustments of engines that offer mixture control carburetors. Note: Initial settings does not assign fuel mix to any channel. Prior to utilizing the Fuel Mix settings, select an unused channel on your receiver and assign it accordingly for the mixture control. Additionally, please make sure that your [Control] and [Trim] are set to null [--]. "

?8,)0<@
0
!





$

 
  	
# 

" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



### %




%

 
 


	!



 ?%$
$
@

?/
$
$
@

,	

 05	
$  0

*
A
!
# 
$!
 "


$
  	


 # "


?A,"@ 
# 

# 114 <Model Menu (Common Functions)> reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 
:!
 

!
 *Needle high trim works as high trim based on the center.

#<!!7J$

## 


	
#	

$

*This function is used to adjust the needle/engine rise characteristics during acceleration. This enables an acceleration function which temporarily increases the needle operation from the throttle stick. This function is used when there are symptoms of the

mixture being too lean or too rich, which would be generated by sudden throttle stick inputs. 

###  ?%



	%#,@




(	
 

###  ?+!$	

	+80
<.@

7
	
#'$
 

###  0




! 	

#  
$!
  %:

 	



*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 
:!
 

!
  ?$
$
	%*#
"@

*The operation point at which the acceleration setting will occur. If this point is exceeded, acceleration is performed. 

###  0


?%*#
"@
! 


$ 	

#  

 Note: When using the acceleration function, since the needle stroke is large, adjust your settings so there is no binding of your linkage.

## #
		
#

* Operation linked with the throttle hold function, throttle cut function, and idle down function is possible. The throttle cut position can be adjusted accordingly. Set it to the full closed position. 

###  0




  
!   
 #   
$!
  %: 
 
 $  	 
 
  <
&#/*8#&1E4<+),+7&C  %:!
 	
& #/ *8#& C9C4 <+), +7&C1CC *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 

!
 

## 
#	
"

j		
¤^_J[ ̈¥	 

J!
¤^E&7=E¥

## 

	"
	E 10


?%*#@
!


# 
$ !
  "


%*#!
 	


 *The display blinks. 

###  # 
 #   
 
 

!
 $
 -0


?0<@
! 
# 
$ !
  "


!5	!
	
 	

 *The display blinks. 

###  #
# 	

!
 

!
 <¤[ ̈¥
¤[ ̈¥


8
<¤^E[ ̈¥ selected, the throttle stick position becomes the master.

## ;	
	
# 10


$

	
!

:
#  
$!
  %:

 	

  <
&C  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo operation position is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 
:!
 

!
 -
$
$


$

## F


	"#"		
# 10
 
   
 


 	 !




!


$ 

 	
# "

 



	!

 

	¤%

Setting Method] at the back of this manual. 

### -0


#<0

! 
# 
 $!
  %:
!
 	


  <
&C  %:!
	
&3'C'C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is

# 115 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 

# MODEL MENU (AIRPLANE/GLIDER FUNCTIONS)
The dedicated mixes, etc. that are applicable when an airplane or glider model type is selected are displayed in this Model menu functions section. Prior to adjusting any of these mixes, etc. use the Model Type function in the Linkage menu to select the model type, wing type, and tail type matched to the aircraft. Other settings reset the data used in mixing function, etc.

For glider, many dedicated mixes can be set for each flight condition, as required. To switch the settings for each condition by switch or stick position, use the Condition Select function to add flight conditions. (Up to five conditions can be used) Note: The T14SG is designed so that the airplane and glider model types can utilize aircraft of the same wing type. The functions common to airplanes and gliders, with the exception of some dedicated functions, are written without regard to the model type. While there may be differences, depending on the number of servos, etc. the wing type used, etc. the setup screens in the instruction manual are typical examples.



# Model Menu functions list
PITCH CURVE Compatible with VPP (Variable Pitch Propeller) function. [Airplane, general]
THR CURVE

THR curve function adjusts the throttle operation curve for optimum engine speed to throttle stick movement. [Airplane/glider, general]
THR DELAY

THR-DELAY function is used to slow the response of the throttle stick to simulate the slow response of a turbine engine, etc. [Airplane, general]
AIL DIFFERENTIAL The left and right aileron differential can be adjusted independently. For glider, the differential 
8

( [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]
FLAP SETTING

76
	



( independently for each servo according to the wing 
¤
6D
¥
AIL to CAMB.FLP78



 mode. It improves the roll axis characteristics. ¤
6D
 ́D
¥
AIL to BRKFLP78

!

 mode. It improves the roll axis characteristics. ¤30
¥ *The Model menu screen depends on the model type. 

### %

!
!
 
 

touching the MDL button twice at the home screen, etc.

"


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or a HOME/ EXIT button is pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>



###  "

 
 

you want to set and a c c e s s t h e s e t u p screen by touching the RTN button. Scrolling 0	

cursor

#
5$ RETURN

# 116 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> AIL 3 (Chip Aileron) AIL 4 (Chip Aileron) AIL1 (Main Aileron) AIL 2 (Main Aileron)

FLP 2 (Camber Flap) FLP 1 (Camber Flap)

ELEVATOR (ELEVATOR 2) V-TAIL AILVATOR FLP 3 (Brake Flap) FLP 4 (Brake Flap) RUDDER 2 Winglet RUDDER 1

RUDDER (RUDDER 2) Winglet at Flying wing at Flying wing 

### ( ) ( )

ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2 (AILERON 5) (AILERON 6) 

## AIL to RUD This mix is used when you want to coordinate the rudder with aileron operation for banking at shallow angles. [Airplane/glider, general]
RUD to AIL This function is used when you want to mix the ailerons with rudder input. Rudder is applied 

!	 [Airplane/glider, general]
CAMBER MIX

This mix adjusts the camber and corrects the elevators. [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]
ELE to CAMBER This mix is used when you want to the mix



		 model. [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]
CAMB.FLP to ELE

This mix is used to correct for changes in attitude when the camber flaps are utilized. [Airplane/ D
 ́,
¥ BUTTERFLY (Crow) This function is used to quickly slow the aircraft and/or reduce the altitude. [Glider, 2 ailerons or #
)D
 ́,
$¥
TRIM MIX

7



		
 can be accessed by selecting a switch or condition selection as desired. [Glider, 2 ailerons or more]
AIRBRAKE This function is used when airbrakes are necessary when landing or when diving, etc. during #
D
$
GYRO

This is a dedicated mix when a GYA Series gyro is used. [Airplane/glider, general]
V-TAIL This function incorporates the elevators and rudder input for use with V-tail models. [Airplane/ 5

¥ AILEVATOR (DUAL ELEVATOR) This function adjusts the elevators and ailerons of models with elevator specifications. [Airplane/ 


¥
WINGLET This function adjusts the left and right rudders of winglet models. [Airplane/glider, winglet 
¥
MOTOR This function adjusts the operation speed when the motor of an F5B or other such EP glider is started by a switch. [Airplane/glider, general]
RUD to ELE This function is used to correct rolling maneuvers 
!	¤

¥
SNAP ROLL

This function selects the snap roll switch and adjusts the amount of servo input. Servo speed can also be adjusted. [Airplane general]

# 117 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

## This function adjusts the pitch curve for VPP (Variable Pitch Propeller) airplane.

*Up to 3 conditions can be set. 7

,°D°@



### NOTE: When VPP is not assigned to any channel, the pitch curve is not displayed in the model menu. In this case, assign VPP to any channel on the function screen. "

?
<#*8,@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

*
 Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

# PIT CURVE ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
4	





## Setting method
?		

 1. Move the cursor to the # button at the top

right side of the screen and touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode.  "

 
 

   	 
 touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to call the setting screen and return to the cursor mode. 2. Move the cursor to the switch item and touch the RTN button to access the selection screen. Select the switch and set its ON direction. *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual. 

###  "



-'

*The VPP conditions can also be checked in the HOME

screen.



## ;	
	
# ?*


	@ 1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting


!:
# button to switch to the data input mode.  %:

 	

  <
&C  %:!
	
&C1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value. 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode. 2. Repeat this procedure for each point. ?0	
$@ 1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting


!:
# button to switch to the data input mode.  %:

$ 	

sensor.  <
&
1&C4
-&-94
'&9C4
;& E94
9&1CC  %:!
	
&8$-9
 :	$ *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the curve position is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode. 2. Repeat this procedure for each point. ?+

	D
	
$@ Move the cursor to the curve point setting 
!


D
 the RTN button for one second. *
$

# 118 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

## This function adjusts the throttle curve for optimum engine speed from throttle stick input.

*When throttle curve is set to ON when there is no throttle function; this curve acts as the motor function.



### NOTE: If this throttle curve function is activated, you can not use the THR-EXP function within the DUAL RATE function simultaneously. "

?#/*8,@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

*
 Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

# THR CURVE ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4	





## Setting method


	"
	E 10


?%*#@
!

the RTN button to switch to the data input mode. Select the ON mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the function and return to the cursor mode.

## ;	
	
# ?*


	@ 1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting


!:
# button to switch to the data input mode.  %:

 	

  <
&C  %:!
	
&C1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode. 2. Repeat this procedure for each point. ?0	
$@ 1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting 
!:
# button to switch to the data input mode.  %:

$ 	

sensor.  <
&
1&C4
-&-94
'&9C4
;& E94
9&1CC  %:!
	
&8$-9
 :	$ *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the curve position is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode. 2. Repeat this procedure for each point. ?+

	D
	
$@ Move the cursor to the curve point setting 
!


D
 the RTN button for one second. *
$

# 119 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

## THR-DELAY function is used to slow the response of the throttle stick to simulate the slow response of a turbine engine, etc.

*This function is the same as THR of servo speed. If it sets up in great numbers, it overlaps and a THR servo becomes late further. Please do not let me overlap. Use either.



### "

?#/+,)%A@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

# THR DELAY ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
4	





## Setting method'

	

	

$	
# 10


?+,)%A@
!

touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode.  %:


 	

sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&C-E!5!!


*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the function and return to the cursor mode.

# 120 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN AIL 3 (Chip Aileron) AIL 4 (Chip Aileron) AIL1 (Main Aileron) AIL 2 (Main Aileron) 

# AIL DIFF. ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4-
!



## The left and right aileron differential can be adjusted independently.

		


8 can be adjusted.

*The display screen is an example. The actual screen depends on the Model Type.



## Setting method
	
@#"	
H
  0



%<)1;
 	
	
!
#  to switch to the data input mode.  %:

	
 	
 touch sensor when the stick is moved to the 
	
  <
&1CC  %:!
	
&C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode. (Currently selected condition name) 

### "

?%<)+<@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### ?%$
-%-@

?.
;%-@ %

D	

:!




## 
	


	
H
		
\ mixing  0


?8##,)A%+8"#@ item and touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode.  %:



 	
 touch sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode.

# 121 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN FLP 2 (Camber Flap) FLP 1 (Camber Flap) FLP 3 (Brake Flap) FLP 4 (Brake Flap) 

# FLAP SET. ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4-H$!


## 76
	

#

) FLP1/2, brake flaps: FLP3/4) can be adjusted independently for each servo according to the wing type. #
$




$
H$ 


offset 

## The camber flaps of a 4-flap model can be mixed with the brake flaps. (BRKFLP to CMBFLP) %D 

 *The display screen is an example. The actual screen depends on the model type.



## Setting method&
	@!	
H
  0


$)
1;8$ Down item according to the wing type and touch the RTN button to switch to the data $!
%:


$

 by scrolling the touch sensor.  <
&1CC  %:!
	
&31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode.

## (



		
H
  0


?",#@
! touch the RTN button to switch to the data $!
%:
$




 point of each flap by scrolling the touch
sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&31CC1CC *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the reference point is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode.

## 

	"
	%
G
	&9		2

	&9	#  0


?%*#@
! the RTN button to switch to the data input !
"


%*#!
 	
 touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the 

!
 $
 To select a switch, move the cursor to the ?"7@
!
#  the selection screen. Select the switch and 

%2332
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual. "

?)%
",#@
0
!



$

screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



### (Glider: Currently selected condition name) $






point offset  8 $  D +   

:!


# 122 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN AIL 3 (Chip Aileron) AIL 4 (Chip Aileron) AIL1 (Main Aileron) AIL 2 (Main Aileron) FLP 2 (Camber Flap) FLP 1 (Camber Flap) 

# AIL to CMBFLP ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4-
-$
more


## This mix operates the camber flaps (FLP1/2) in the aileron mode. When the aileron stick is manipulated, the ailerons and camber flaps perform aileron operation simultaneously to 


8 #


D	!5	

H$


 

$

:
 %D 

 )	$ 
&)!5
!5




### %:!



H$




## Setting method


	"
	  0


?%*#@
! the RTN button to switch to the data input !
"


%*#!
 	
 touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the 

!
 $
 When selecting a switch, move the cursor to 
?"7@
!
#  call the selection screen. Select the switch 

%2332 
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual.

## #	

	
H
  0


$)
1-
 or right item according to the wing type and touch the RTN button to switch to the  $ !
 %: 
 !5	 
 independently by scrolling the touch sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode.

## 9G	
	
# When linking a mix, move the cursor to the ?)<I@ 
!   
 #   switch to the data input mode. Select the ON mode by scrolling the touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to set the link mode and return to the cursor mode. "

?%<)*0)
@
0


menu and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button. *The display screen is an example. The actual screen depends on the model type.

Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### (Glider: Currently selected condition name)

# 123 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN AIL 3 (Chip Aileron) AIL 4 (Chip Aileron) AIL1 (Main Aileron) AIL 2 (Main Aileron) FLP 3 (Brake Flap) FLP 4 (Brake Flap) 

# AIL to BRAKEFLP ?*
$	!
$
@&.
4;H$



## This mix operates the brake flaps (FLP3/4) in the aileron mode. When the aileron stick is



!
	 the aileron operation simultaneously and the roll axis is improved.  #
 
 
  	 !5	 
  


:

$

H$
 05			 

D 


	%?33@
	 )	 

&)!5
!5




### "

?%<)I)
@
0


menu and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



### %:!



H$
 *The display screen is an example. The actual screen depends on the model type.

(Currently selected condition name)



## Setting method


	"
	  0


?%*#@
! the RTN button to switch to the data input !
"


%*#!
 	
 touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the 

!
 $
 When setting a switch, move the cursor to 
 ?"7@ 
!   
 #  to access the selection screen. Select the 

% 2332
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual.

## #	

	
H
  0


$)
';
 right item and touch the RTN button to switch 
$!
%:
!5	 rate independently by scrolling the touch sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode.

## 9G	
	
# To activate the mixing, move the cursor to 
?)<I@
!
#  switch to the data input mode. Select the ON mode by scrolling the touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to set the link mode and return to the cursor mode.

# 124 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN RUDDER 2 RUDDER RUDDER V-TAIL RUDDER 2 Winglet RUDDER 1 Winglet at Flying wing at Flying wing 

# ( ) ( ) AIL 3 AIL 3 (Chip Aileron) (Chip Aileron) AIL1 (Main Aileron) AIL 2 (Main Aileron) 

# AIL to RUD ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4	





## Use this mix when you want to mix the rudders with aileron operation. This allows the aircraft to bank at a steep angle. 05			 

D 

%?33@
	 #
!5	
 
:




###  "

 ?%<)  8+@  


Model menu and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

*The display screen is an example. The actual screen depends on the model type. Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### (Glider: Currently selected condition name)



## Setting method


	"
	  0


?%*#@
! the RTN button to switch to the data input !
"


%*#!
 	
 touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the 

!
 $
 When selecting a switch, move the cursor to 
?"7@
!
#  call the selection screen. Select the switch 

%2332 
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual. 

## #	

	
H
 Move the cursor to the left or right item and touch the RTN button to switch to the  $ !
 %: 
 !5	 
 independently by scrolling the touch sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode.

# 125 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN RUDDER 2 RUDDER RUDDER V-TAIL RUDDER 2 Winglet RUDDER 1 Winglet at Flying wing at Flying wing 

# ( ) ( ) AIL 3 AIL 3 (Chip Aileron) (Chip Aileron) AIL1 (Main Aileron) AIL 2 (Main Aileron) 

# RUD to AIL ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4	





## This function is used when you want to mix the ailerons with rudder input. It is used when rudder is applied during roll maneuvers such as, knife edge flight. It can be used to turn orbank scale models, large models, etc. like a fullsize aircraft. 05			 

D 


	%?33@
	 )	 

&)!5
!5
 #
!5	
 
:
 %93$
 

$
!
$




###  "

 ?8+  %<)@  
 0


menu and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

*The display screen is an example. The actual screen depends on the model type. Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



## Setting method


	"
	  0


?%*#@
! the RTN button to switch to the data input !
"


%*#!
 	
 touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the 

!
 $
 When setting a switch, move the cursor to 
?"7@
!
#  call the selection screen. Select the switch 

%2332 
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual. 

## #	

	
H
	#
$ Move the cursor to the left or right item and touch the RTN button to switch to the  $ !
 %: 
 !5	 
 independently by scrolling the touch sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode.

## 9G	
	
# To activate the link mixing, move the cursor 
?)<I@
!
#  to switch to the data input mode. Select the ON mode by scrolling the touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to set the link mode and return to the cursor mode. (Glider: Currently selected condition name)

# 126 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>;	
	
#	


$

?*


	@ 1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting


!

: the RTN button to switch to the data input mode.  %:

 	

  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode. 2. Repeat this procedure for each point. ?0	
$@ 1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting


!:
# button to switch to the data input mode.  %:

$ 	

sensor.  %:!
	
&8$-9
 :	$ *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the curve position is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode. 2. Repeat this procedure for each point. ?+

	D
	
$@ Move the cursor to the curve point setting 
!


D
 the RTN button for one second.

# 127 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# CAMBER MIX ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4-
!



## This function adjusts the rate of camber operation for the wing camber (ailerons, camber flaps, brake flaps) in the negative and positive directions. The aileron, flap, and elevator rates can also be adjusted independently and attitude changes caused by camber operation can be corrected. *Initial setting assigns camber operation to side lever LS.  #
 $D 
  
 
4 $4 



 
:
7

!5	 



 
	
4:!
 can be made by changing the mixing rate $3 05			 

D 


	%?33@
	 %
 

%



 





### *


cut switch *


setting

%



:!
 (Glider: Currently selected condition name) 

### "

?*%0,0<@
0


menu and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button. *The display screen is an example. The actual screen depends on the model type.

Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



### $


:!


,



:!


# 128 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> AIL 3 (Chip Aileron) AIL 4 (Chip Aileron) AIL1 (Main Aileron) AIL 2 (Main Aileron) FLP 2 (Camber Flap) FLP 1 (Camber Flap)

ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2 V-TAIL

ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2 AILVATOR FLP 3 (Brake Flap) FLP 4 (Brake Flap) 

## Setting method


	"
	  0


?%*#@
! the RTN button to switch to the data input !
"


%*#!
 	
 touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the 

!
 $
 When setting a switch, move the cursor to 
?"7@
!
#  call the selection screen. Select the switch 

%2332 
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual.

## 2	

	
#  0


?*++,)%A@
! and touch the RTN button to switch to the $!
%:

 by scrolling the touch sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&C-E

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode. When setting a cut switch, move the cursor  
 ?*8#3"7@ 
!   
 # button to access the selection screen. Select 


% 2332
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual.

## (

	
H
  #
 
 
 :
  
	 
 
4H$4




 Move the cursor to the rate1 or rate2 item and touch the RTN button to switch  
  $ !
 %: 
 
 independently by scrolling the touch sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode.

# 129 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# ELE to CAMBER ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4-
! 

## This function is used when you want to mix the



< the flaps are lowered by up elevator, and lift is increased. <3H	!5	 

D 		 %?33@
	 #
!5	
 
:
 #
$







$


 
:
 .
 

## F
Z	7"
	


		"
	

	!#	!	
 
	


	!"
	"			


E

#	

	
H
 Move the cursor to the up or down mixing rate item for each servo and touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode. %:


$

 	 the touch sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode.



## Setting method


	"
	  0


?%*#@
! the RTN button to switch to the data input !
"


%*#!
 	
 touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the 

!
 $
 When setting a switch, move the cursor to 
?"7@
!
#  call the selection screen. Select the switch 

%2332 
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual.

## (
#
	
#	,
	$  0


?%.,@
! hold the elevator stick to the desired position $$




# button for one second to set the range. *The mixing does not work near neutral of the elevator stick. 

###  <
&C  %:!
	
&C1CC (Glider: Currently selected condition name) "

?,),*%0,@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

*The display screen is an example. The actual screen depends on the model type. Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$

# 130 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2 V-TAIL

ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2 AILVATOR FLP 2 (Camber Flap) FLP 1 (Camber Flap) 

# CMBFLP to ELE ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4 -
1H$!



## When the camber/speed flaps are utilized, the aircraft might experience, a change in pitch. This mix compensates for such changes by incorporating elevator input.  #
 

 
 $D 
  


:
 
$
 < 
 !5	 
  


4	

!5	
$© 05			 

D 


	%?33@
	



###  ,  
          


:!




## Setting method


	"
	  0


?%*#@
! the RTN button to switch to the data input !
"


%*#!
 	
 touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the 

!
 $
 When setting a switch, move the cursor to 
?"7@
!
#  call the selection screen. Select the switch 

%2332 
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual. 

## #	

	
H
  0


%#,1%#,-
! and touch the RTN button to switch to the  $ !
 %: 
 !5	 
 independently by scrolling the touch sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode. "

?*0)
,),@
0
!


access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

* T h e d i s p l a y s c r e e n i s a n example. The actual screen depends on the model type. Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### (Glider: Currently selected condition name)

# 131 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# BUTTERFLY ?*
$	!
$
@&.
4!&-
! 	&-
1H$! 

## This function is utilized to quickly slow the aircraft and reduce altitude by simultaneously raising the left and right ailerons and lowering the
#


!
$

Butterfly (Crow) produces an extremely	


 the following: 1. Slow the aircraft’s velocity. - 

	$

 the tendency to tip stall. ' *

!




 		H
$

 05			 

D 


	%?33@
	  #
 $   
 
 $


reference point can be offset. #
$
$



$

 
:
 #



 
:


*For a description of the setting method, see the aileron differential function.



### 
H$




$ "

?8##,)A@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button. *The display screen is an example. The actual screen depends on the model type.

Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### (Currently selected condition name)



### "
$


 ,
:!
 %
DH$


:!


# 132 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> Setting method


	"
	  0


?%*#@
! the RTN button to switch to the data input !
"


%*#!
 	
 touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the 

!
 $
 When setting a switch, move the cursor to 
?"7@
!
#  call the selection screen. Select the switch 

%2332 
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual.

## (

	
H
 Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or elevator rate item and touch the RTN button 
$!
%:
 rate independently by scrolling the touch
sensor.  <
&C  %:!
 	
& 3-CC-CC ,
& 31-C1-C *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode. 

## 	

	

	
	
H
 $A 
 Offset point 5
C 5

 $ -3<
!

$ Settable Settable 13,$ Settable 5
 * The range where mixing does not work close to the neutral position of the elevator stick can be adjusted. (Glider only)

*When offset is set, the curve is initialized.

## (



		
H
  0


?",#@
! hold the airbrake stick to the desired position and then touch the RTN button for one second to set the butterfly operational reference point.  <
&C$$

  %:!
	
&C1CC

## 
	

	
# Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or elevator speed item and touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode.  %:

 	

  <
&C  %:!
	
&C-E!5!!


*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the function and return to the cursor mode.

AIL 3 (Chip Aileron) AIL 4 (Chip Aileron) AIL1 (Main Aileron) AIL 2 (Main Aileron) FLP 2 (Camber Flap) FLP 1 (Camber Flap)

ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2 V-TAIL

ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2 AILVATOR FLP 3 (Brake Flap) FLP 4 (Brake Flap)

# 133 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# TRIM MIX ?*
$	!
$
@&.
4-
!



## This function adjusts the trim offset rates of the


#


! 
$



As an example this function can be set up for 



 and a slight amount of up elevator, and can be	


 speed flaps reflexed slightly, and a bit of down elevator.

To prevent sudden trim changes when switching






"

?#<00<@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button. *The display screen is an example. The actual screen depends on the model type.

Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

## smooth transition between the two conditions. It is also possible to program a cut switch which will turn off the delay. Furthermore, you can set the auto switch, which will link the trim mix to a stick, switch, or dial.

Additionally, the speed of the aileron, elevator,


(

(Currently selected condition name)



### *


setting  %
4 $4  elevators servo speed setting

%

   %   
     4     $  4    

elevators offset rate

 "     

selection

# 134 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> Setting method


	"
	  0


?%*#@
! the RTN button to switch to the data input !
"


%*#!
 	
 touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the 

!
 $
 When setting a switch, move the cursor to the switch item and touch the RTN button to access the selection screen. Select the 

% 2332
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual.

## 7	
	

	
H
 Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or elevator rate item and touch the RTN button 
$!
%:
 rate independently by scrolling the touch
sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&3-9C-9C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode.

## 2	

	
#  0


?*++,)%A@
! and touch the RTN button to switch to the $!
%:

 by scrolling the touch sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&C-E

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo operation position is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode. When setting a cut switch, move the cursor  
 ?*8#3"7@ 
!   
 # button to access the selection screen. Select 


% 2332
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual.

## 
	

	
# Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or elevator speed item and touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode.  %:

 	

  <
&C  %:!
	
&C-E!5!!


*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the function and return to the cursor mode.


## 	!"	

 When selecting an auto switch, move the 
?%8#3"7@
!
 RTN button to access the selection screen. Select the switch and set its ON direction. %2332
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual.

AIL 3 (Chip Aileron) AIL 4 (Chip Aileron) AIL1 (Main Aileron) AIL 2 (Main Aileron) FLP 2 (Camber Flap) FLP 1 (Camber Flap)

ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2 V-TAIL

ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2 AILVATOR FLP 3 (Brake Flap) FLP 4 (Brake Flap)

# 135 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# AIRBRAKE ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
4-
!



## This function is used to increase the aircraft's drag and is useful for landing or diving, etc.

The preset elevators and flaps (camber flap, brake flap) offset amount can be activated by a switch.

The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, and flap servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the 	




 be adjusted. If the Auto Mode is activated, this will link the Airbrake to a stick, switch, or dial. A separate stick switch or dial can also be set as the ON/OFF switch. 
#	


		&	
	"
	\

	

 7
-
!
$



 Offset rate:  %<)&?3'93;9@4%<)-&?3'93;9@4,),&?9E@

Note: The input numerics are examples. Adjust the travel to

match the aircraft. Mode setting:  %*#&?@  "&?"73*@  %8#3"7&?33@



### "

?%<%I,@
0
!



the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button. *The display screen is an example. The actual screen depends on the model type.

Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



###  %
4 $4 

elevators servo speed setting

%

   %   
     4     $  4    

elevators offset rate

 "     

selection

# 136 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> Setting method


	"
	  0


?%*#@
! the RTN button to switch to the data input !
"


%*#!
 	
 touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the 

!
 $
 When setting a switch, move the cursor to the switch item and touch the RTN button to access the selection screen. Select the 

% 2332
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual.

## '
	

	
H
 Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or elevator rate item and touch the RTN button 
$!
%:
 rate independently by scrolling the touch
sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&3-9C-9C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode. 

## 
	

	
# Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or elevator speed item and touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode.  %:

 	

  <
&C  %:!
	
&C-E!5!!


*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

### Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor mode.

## 	!"	

 When setting a auto switch, move the cursor 
?%8#3"7@
!
# button to access the selection screen. Select 


% 2332
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual.

AIL 3 (Chip Aileron) AIL 4 (Chip Aileron) AIL1 (Main Aileron) AIL 2 (Main Aileron) FLP 2 (Camber Flap) FLP 1 (Camber Flap)

ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2 V-TAIL

ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2 AILVATOR FLP 3 (Brake Flap) FLP 4 (Brake Flap)

# 137 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# GYRO ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4	




## This function is used when a GYA Series gyro is used to stabilize the aircraft's attitude. The sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/ AVCS mode) can be changed via a switch.  #

 
 
 1D
 -D
 '  


switched.  8$  ' 5
 .D. -D. '  


simultaneously controlled. 

### Note: This setting does not assign a sensitivity channel. To do so, use the Linkage menu prior to assigning the sensitivity channel (Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3), be sure to select an unused channel. Set the [Control] and [Trim] settings other than Function to [--].

#
$
!
%*"D

and sensitivity of the three axis .D.-D.' 

 "

?.A@
0
!


access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### (Active rate # display)



###  . $


selection  %*#D</  "

     
 1 3 '   
   $

screen selection ?
1
$

@

?
-
$

@

?
'
$

@



## Setting method

*Prior to using the Function menu in the Linkage menu to assign the sensitivity channel (Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3) select an unused channel. Set [Control] and [Trim] other than function to [--].

## (

*;	
	

	

 Move the cursor to the setup screen selection item and touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode. Select the setup screen # by scrolling the touch sensor. Touch the RTN button to change the setup screen and return to the cursor mode.

## 

	"
	  0


?</@
! the RTN button to switch to the data input !
"


%*#!
 	
 touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the function and return to the cursor mode.

# 138 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> When setting a rate selection switch, move the cursor to the switch item and touch the RTN button to access the selection screen. Select the switch and set its ON direction. %2332
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual.

## ,	
	

 Move the cursor to the gyro type selection item and touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode. Select the gyro type by scrolling the touch sensor.  ?.A@&7
 .A%	
  ?0@&7
	!
	
  .A%	
 Touch the RTN button to change the gyro type and return to the cursor mode. *When a Futaba GYA gyro is used and [GY] type is selected, the sensitivity set value is directly read in both the AVCS and NORM modes.

## '

	
	

	,X	#$ Move the cursor to the operation mode selection item and touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode. Select the operation mode by scrolling the touch
sensor.  ?%*"@&%*"!  ?0@&!! Touch the RTN button to change the operation mode and return to the cursor mode.

## 
	
# Move the cursor to the sensitivity icon and touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode.  %:

 	

sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&C1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the

sensitivity is reset to the initial value.) 

### Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor mode.



$	
#	"

	
	#	
	,X+V	
	,X+*	M$ 7	$
&%
-
!

	



 "
.1.A%;'1%<)&*/94.-.A%;'1,),&*/E4.'.A%;'C8+&*/B


!

)	
!
 
1?@?.A@?",@?0@?FC@?0@?FC@?0@?FC@  
-?</@  
'?@?.A@?",@?%*"@?FC@?%*"@?FC@?%*"@?FC@

*Set so that Rate 1 is turned on at the back position of switch E and Rate 3 is turned ON at the front position. Since switch E is turned OFF at the center, Rate 2 remains [INH].

R7008SB



### Rudder servo Elevator servo

GYA430 GYA431

GYA431 

### Aileron servo

S.BUS/S.BUS2 port
:KHQD6%86SRUWLVXVHG 56%&+0RGHLVVHWWR 0RGH%>'@ GAIN 0% AVCS

NORMAL When AVCS is used we recommend that the sensitivity CH be set to the 3-position.

# 139 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

### ELEVATOR (RUDDER 2) RUDDER (ELEVATOR 2) 

# V-TAIL ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
43


## This function enables adjustments for left and right rudder angle changes during elevator and rudder operation of a V-tail airplane.

V-tail is when two servos are used together to control rudder movement as elevators. In addition to each elevator side moving up and down together, each side moves in opposite directions when moving as rudders. On a V-tail, this is also known as a Ruddervator, as they serve the same purpose.


 L e f t a n d r i g h t t r a v e l   :    ! 
           
  operation ,
  8$
:!
 elevator operation "

?3#%<)@
0
!


access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



## Setting method	7

	
H
 Move the cursor to the item you want to :
#  the data input mode.  %:

 	

  <
&9C  %:!
	
&31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

### Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor mode. *If the mixing direction is reversed, adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate polarity (+ or -). *If a large value of travel is specified, when the sticks are moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run out of travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.

# 140 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

## ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2 (AILERON 5) (AILERON 6) 

# AILEVATOR ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4%
 (Effective only when 2 servos used at the elevators)


## This function improves the performance of the roll axis by operating the elevators as ailerons.

Ailevator is where each elevator in a standard (conventional) or v-tail moves independently, like ailerons on a wing. In addition to each elevator side moving up and down together, each side moves in opposite directions when moving as an Ailevator. On a V-tail, this is also known as a Ruddervator, as they can serve the same purpose. Typically, both Ailevator and ailerons are coupled together to maximize roll performance, especially on larger wingspan planes.


&"

%

0
#$

0
 #$


#	

$
*
 
!




### %
 7







as ailerons, aileron travel of the left and right elevators  
:
 ,
  #
 $   
  

elevators when the elevator stick is moved can be individually :
 "

?%<),%#@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



## Setting method	7

	
H
 Move the cursor to the item you want to :
#  the data input mode.  %:

 	

  <
&,),&1CC4%<)&C  %:!
	
&31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

### Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor mode. *If the mixing direction is reversed, adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate polarity (+ or -). *If a large value of travel is specified, when the sticks are moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run out of travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.

# 141 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN RUDDER 1 Winglet at Flying wing 

# ( )

RUDDER 2 Winglet at Flying wing 

# ( ) 

# WINGLET ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4		



## This function adjusts the left and right rudder angles of airplanes with winglets.

Winglets are used to improve the efficiency of aircraft by lowering the lift-induced drag caused by wingtip vortices. The winglet is a vertical or angled extension located at the tip of each wing.

Winglets work by increasing the effective aspect ratio wing without adding greatly to the structural stress and hence necessary weight of its structure - an extension of wing span would also permit lowering of induced drag, though it would cause parasitic drag and would require boosting the strength of the wing and hence its weight. There would come a point at which no overall useful gains would be made. A winglet helps to solve this by effectively increasing the aspect ratio without adding to the span of the wing.


1D- #

	
$


 
:
 "

?7<.),#@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



## Setting method	7

	
H
 Move the cursor to the item you want to :
#  the data input mode.  %:

 	

  <
&1CC  %:!
	
&31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

### Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor mode. *If the mixing direction is reversed, change the mixing rate polarity (+ or -).

# 142 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# MOTOR ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4	





## This function lets you set the speed when the motor of an F5B or other EP glider is started via a switch. The operation speed can be set for two ranges, slow speed flight and high speed flight (Speed 1/Speed 2). This function can also be operated as a safety function by programming it to a switch. #
<

$
	$



:

$

-	
"$

1D "$

- #
  



-	
 



!"$

1"$

- #
$
$

 




$
/

4$
 
 
$

 
	
 


 $
>
7



 !
$
4

%*#D</
!?</@ 


?@ #
!

 "73..
&

<
	7
		
 
!4>	
 the Linkage menu. <
0
#$



%$
4
0#

	
!</ assigned to another channel, the changes from the throttle channel to the motor channel are enabled. 

### Note: Initial setting does not assign a motor

channel according to the model type. Prior to 

	

 channel. Then, use the Function menu of the Linkage menu. Set [Control] to the switch you want to use and [Trim] to [--]. Note: When using this function, always check

the initial operation with the propeller removed. "

?0#@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



## Setting method
	

	"
	 When using this function, move the cursor to 
?%*#D</@
!
#  to switch to the data input mode. Select the ?%*#@ 	

 the RTN button.  7


	
D4!

 cursor to the switch item and touch the RTN button to access the selection screen. Select 


% 2332
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual.

## 				
#  0


?0#@
! and touch the RTN button for one second 

!".4
 
!$
#
 direction of the motor switch is memorized. #


	$$
 changes. Note: 
	



	



set the speed. When you want to reset the motor OFF direction, also reset the speed.   	

  

    

combination with F/S. 	
!

	


Reverse function to match the ESC used. #

!



# 143 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> Setting method	

	"
		

	 When using motor speed function, move the 
?</@
!
# button to switch to the data input mode. "


?%*#@ 	

 and touch the RTN button.

## 	#	"
	
	
!

	"
	M	
#
  0


?"
,,+1£-@
! touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode.  %:
 $ 	
 touch sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

### Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor mode.

## 	'

	

	
H
  0


?<@?8#@ 
!
#  switch to the data input mode.  %:
$
$


 by scrolling the touch sensor.  <
&C  %:!
	
&C-E

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

### Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor mode.

## 	
@(

	"
	
	
	

  0


?,#<0,@
! touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode.  "


?%*#@ 	

 and touch the RTN button to set the one time operation. * When you want to reset one time operation, set the ACT/ INH item to [INH] and then reset it to [ON]. 

### 0

current position 

## 
	!"	 7
 
4 
 2"#%# "72  
 !6
	
!#
 !

!"72"#%# "72

!
#
! 	


!"7 
<2"#%#"72
 
 main SW is still ON, the motor remains ON. [START SW function example] When the throttle (motor) stick is assigned as the "START SW", and the low throttle position of the throttle curve is adjusted, the motor starts operating with the initial stick movement. The motor will not cease functionality even if the stick position is returned to it's lowest setting.

## 7	

	@	
	
#			'&&

<

!

	

 Motor function, it is possible to turn the motor off with the trim lever. To maintain !$ 
$	
#1;".D"4 
!
	:

$ /

4		



 position accordingly in the programming of the transmitter. *Data Reset will return the trim setting to the off position.

## 

	
	"
	
		"
		'&&	
#

7

0#
			
4 you will note the presence of the small cursor 

0#$# :  0#  $4 
 
 throttle stick to move the cursor accordingly. When satisfied with this position, press and hold the RTN button on the transmitter. *The larger cursor is used to indicate the output of the motor 
7


 mixing which may be active.



## 7"
	
	

7
2*8,2 
4
 curve screen opens. *When a throttle function is assigned to either channel, the

"CURVE" button is not displayed because a throttle curve does not function as a motor curve. 

### D


# 144 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# RUD to ELE ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
4	





## This function is used when you want to mix elevator operation with rudder operation. It is used to correct undesirable tendencies when rudder is applied in rolling maneuvers such as, knife edge  05			 

D  
	%?33@
	 )!5	 

&)!5
!5




###  "

 ?8+  ,),@  
 0


menu and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



## Setting method


	"
	  0


?%*#@
! the RTN button to switch to the data input !
"


%*#!
 	
 touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to activate the 

!
 $
 When selecting a switch, move the cursor to 
?"7@
!
#  call the selection screen. Select the switch 

%2332 
	 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual.

## ;	
	
#	


$ ?*


	@ 1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting


!

: the RTN button to switch to the data input mode.  %:

 	

  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode. 2. Repeat this procedure for each point. ?0	
$@ 1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting


!:
# button to switch to the data input mode.  %:

$ 	

sensor.  %:!
	
&8$-9
 :	$ *When the RTN button is touched for one second, the curve position is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode. 2. Repeat this procedure for each point. ?+

	D
	
$@ Move the cursor to the curve point setting 
!


D
 the RTN button for one second.

## 9G	
	
# When selecting the link mixing, move the 
?)<I@
!
# button to switch to the data input mode. Select the ON mode by scrolling the touch
sensor. *The display blinks. 

### Touch the RTN button to set the link mode and return to the cursor mode.

# 145 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> "


!


and return to the Model menu by touching the RTN button. Or the HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s pushed. 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# SNAP ROLL ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
4	





## This function selects the switch and rate adjustment of ailerons, elevators, and rudder when a snap roll is performed. $
 

	D$4

	D4
D$4
D $
!
&7
?0
@!



4


"$
D 
 !
<$ 



 switch was switched to the direction in which you $7
?"	
@!



4 the snap roll in each direction can be executed by means of independent switches and positions.  % 
   
 
  $

 




   
 $   example, the landing gear is lowered, even if the switch is turned on accidentally the snap roll would not be executed. The snap roll switch is 



 

## (Example) Setting example for F3A 0
&?0
@ "
"7&?".@"
!

 0
"7&?"/@0
5
	

$ +

&

*The snap roll up side left and right and down side left and right direction switches are selected here. 	D8$&?"+@ 	D+&?"+@ )
D8$&?"%@ )
D+&?"%@



###  0
D	
 !


selection "

?"%
))@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



### +



# 146 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> Setting method

@#
	
	

  0


?0+,@
! touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode. Select the master or single mode by scrolling the touch sensor. *The display blinks. 

###  ?0%"#,@&0
!  ?"<.),@&"	
! Touch the RTN button to select the mode and return to the cursor mode. When setting a master switch, move the 
?0%"#,3"7@
! the RTN button to access the selection screen. Select the switch and set its ON direction. *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual. 

### When setting a safety switch, move the 
?"%,#A3"7@
!
 RTN button to access the selection screen. Select the switch and set its ON direction.


## 
	!"	

 Move the cursor to the direction switch item and touch the RTN button to access the selection screen. Select the switch and set its ON direction. *For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at the back of this manual.

## (

	
H
 Move the cursor to the aileron, elevator or rudder item for each direction and touch the RTN button to switch to the data input mode. %:


$

 	 the touch sensor.  <
&+
$

$
$ 
  %:!
	
&319C19C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 and return to the cursor mode.

# 147 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> "


!




0
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT         $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# MODEL MENU (HELICOPTER)

This section contains information on the commands that apply to helicopters only. For instructions on Airplanes and Sailplanes, refer to the sections pertaining to those aircraft.

Use the Model Type function in the Linkage Menu to select the swash type matched to the respective aircraft.

Also, activate/deactivate flight conditions according to your model. To do so, access at the Condition Select screen prior to adjusting the

#^
 used) The Dual Rate function and other functions







+
	 these respective sections for information on how to do so.



# Model Menu functions (helicopter) list

PIT CURVE: (		 THR CURVE: 7

(		 THR HOLD: Moves the throttle to idle during autorotation SWASH MIX: &
		 THROTTLE MIX: Compensates for power loss when cyclic applied PIT to NEEDLE: (		 PIT to RUD: Compensates torque changes from pitch angle inputs GYRO: Used to switch gyro sensitivity GOVERNOR: ^\+[	9
 %

0
!
 
 

	
# 

!
 

4


" 0	

#
5$



###  "

 
  

  
  
   
   
   $     
 
    	
# 

# 148 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> "


!




0
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT         $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# PIT CURVE/PIT TRIM
Pitch Curve

This function adjusts the pitch operation curve for each flight condition to optmize the model's performance in relationship to the throttle stick position. 

	 
 value at the corresponding points.



## Normal curve adjustment





^	7\ Curve (Normal) function and adjust the curve so that up/


 

## Idle up curve adjustment

*For the high side pitch curve, set the maximum pitch

so that it does not overload the engine. For the low side pitch curve, create curves matched to loop, roll, 3D, and other purposes and use the idle up curves according to the performance. 

## Throttle hold curve adjustment

*The throttle hold curve is used when executing auto rotations. 

## Operation precautions 

# Warning
When actually starting the engine and flying, always set the idle up condition switch to OFF and start the engine at idle. "

?
<#*8,@
0
!





$

 
 	
 # 



### 

$ " 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### (Currently selected condition name)



### 10



$
	


!


D
 
# 



## "	
		  0

*
A
# 
$!
 "


$
   	


# "


?A,"@
#  
 
$ 

## Setting method;	
	
# ?*


	@ 10





	


!:
# 
$!
  %:

 	

  <
&
1&31CC4
-&39C4
'&C4
;& 9C4
9&1CC  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

<\7E	
 reset to the initial value. 

###  #
# 

:!
 

!
 -
$
  $

  
 $  

 ?0	
$@ 10



$
	


!:
# 
$!
  %:

$ 	


  <
&
1&C4
-&-94
'&9C4
;& E94
9&1CC  %:!
	
&8$-9
 :	$<\7E	 position is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 

!
 -
$
  $

  
 $  

 ?+

	D
	
$@ *The graph display includes the pitch trim operation.

# 149 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> Normal Curve Idle-up 1 Curve Idle-up 2 Curve Hold Curve

## '(%)*+	,7

 entering the pitch rate at low, center, and high side (3 points or 5 points) at each condition. When actually creating a curve, input the rate#	
$ Curve setting examples



# Pitch Trim (Hovering pitch, high pitch, low pitch)

?/
	$!
	@



## Hovering pitch trim 7+	 near the hovering point. Normally, it is used with7
 	



 



 conditions. Adjust the hovering pitch so that
7	
 77	 for more precise operation. Setting method "

%*#?@
	 "


:!
   "


5!$
&)+
	 #
!$
!
0
&*#0D

0 



 CTRM mode: 05!!!	
 
 

  

 ! $
 
!!

 NORM mode:     !       !   $      
  !
!
!$
#
	
 	!


	$  
 :
  		 


  #
 ! 
  
 :
  


$

 
	
 #!:!
	
	

  7

!
!4! 






# 150 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> ?)D/	$!
	@



## High Pitch/Low Pitch Trim

+6J+7 high side and low side trim function. Setting method "

%*# "


:!
   "


5!$
&)"	
4" 
  #
 ! 
  
 :
  


$

 
	
 #!	

!







# 151 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> "


!




0
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT         $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# THR CURVE/THROTTLE HOVER TRIM

Throttle Curve

Throttle curve function adjusts the throttle operation curve for each condition to optimize the engine speed to throttle stick movement.

77	 near the hovering point. Normally, use it with hovering conditions. Changes in rotor speed accompanying changes in the temperature,
 
  	  
  trimmed. Adjust the throttle so that rotor rotation is
[
	
+ function.

"

?#/*8,@
0
!





$

 
  	
#  *The graph display includes the throttle hover trim operation.

" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### (Currently selected condition name)



### #

$ 
 
$



## Normal curve adjustment
E
  
 
 
   
 hovering. Use it along with the normal pitch curve and adjust so that up/down control results in a constant engine speed. 

## Idle up curve adjustment

*Set a idle up curve that maintains a constant speed at all times, even during operation which reduces the pitch 	&


 3D, or other purposes and the idle up curve according to the performance. 

## Operation precautions 

# Warning
When actually starting the engine and flying, always set the idle up condition switch to OFF and start the engine at the idle. ?+

	D
	
$@ 10



$
	


!


D
 
# 



## 7"
	
		  0
 
 *
A 
!   
 # 
$!
 "


$
   	


# "


?A,"@
#  

## Setting method;	
	
# ?*


	@ 10





	


!:
# 
$!
  %:

 	

  <
&
1&C4
-&-94
'&9C4
;&E94 9&1CC  %:!
	
&C1CC

<\7E	
 reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 

!
 -
$
  $

  
 $  

 ?0	
$@ 10



$
	


!:
# 
$!
  %:

$ 	


  <
&
1&C4
-&-94
'&9C4
;& E94
9&1CC  %:!
	
&8$-9
 :	$<\7E	 position is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 

!
 - 
$
$


$



# 152 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> Normal Curve Idle-up 1 Curve Idle-up 2 Curve

## )*+	,7

 the data of the 5 points 0% (low side), 25%, 50% (center), 75%, 100% (high) side for each condition. When actually creating a curve, enter the 

#	 value). Curve setting examples



# Throttle Hover trim

Setting method "

%*#?@
	 "


:!
   "


5!$
&+ 
	 #
!$
!
0
&*#0D

0 



 CTRM mode:  05!! 
  	
 
 

  

 ! $
 
!!

 NORM mode: ! !  !
!
!$
  #
 ! 
  
 :
  


$

 

 #!:!
	
	

  7!

4
!
 



 ?#

!
	@

# 153 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 

# Throttle limiter function

Setting method

*Set at the 3rd page of the throttle curve screen.


## 

	"
	E 1"

%*#
#  -"
$%*# 	
 
 #
$   </&<   %*#&% ' ,
 
 

  	 
 #  

## 'F@'&&	!"	
# 1"

"7
#  -#
/D7",#

$
"


 

#  

## This function limits the high range of the throttle



&
(




## =#"	
	

#	
#
	
# 1"

/<./
#  - %: 
 	 
 $
	 	
 

	

 *A gauge is displayed at the left side of the graph. 

### '#
# 
 !
 

## 9!	
	

#	
#
	
# 1"

)7
#  - %: 
  
 $
	 	
 

	

 *A gauge is displayed at the left side of the graph. 

### '#
# 
 !
 

## 9
	

#	
#
	
H
	 setting 1"

*#)
#  -#
/D7",#

$
"


 

# 7


 dotted line on the graph. *When limiter operating range adjustment control is NULL, the throttle limiter function is not performed. 

## 2"
##	"
		

	 1"

*,#,
# 

1
*,#,	
!</¦
 $§ - 7
 
 *,#, 
  	
4 
 
$


*#)  
:
<&_E7_\E
 LOW intermediate value. <&_E7_\
	E


 CENTER rate is set to the LOW intermediate value.7&_E7_\

3
J=< 

### ?#
!

	@

When "CTRL" is set as a "RS" side slider. The state of full high of a throttle stick.

“RS”Position Throttle Position
FullRestrictionRestrictionRestriction Slow

Full

Slow

Full

Slow In "INH", the halfway point of "HIGH" and "LOW". HIGH

LOW CENTER 6%

# 154 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> "


!




0
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT         $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# THR HOLD

This function sets the throttle cut position for auto rotation. The throttle servo operating speed

(#%$ Note: Initially, this setting does not assign the throttle hold switch. Prior to adjusting the parameters for the throttle hold, we suggest designating a throttle hold switch. To do so, access the Condition menu within the Model menu options.

"
$





## Setting method
=		!"	

  8

*

!

0
 !
	
  "


5!$
&".

## =		
H
  0


$
! 
# 
 $!
  %:

 	

  <
&1E  %:!
	
&C9C

(


<\7E	
 reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 

!
 

## 
	

	
#  0



$


! 
# 
 $!
  %:

 	

  <
&C  %:!
	
&C-E!5!!


<\7E	
 reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

 !
 "

?#//)+@
0
!





$

  	
# 

" 0	 "

	! %:	



### /$
 /$ *
$



## Operation precautions 

# Warning
When actually starting the engine and flying, always set the idle up condition switch to OFF and start the engine at idle.

# 155 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> "


!




0
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT         $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# SWASH MIX

The swash mix function is used to correct the swash plate in the aileron (roll) direction and elevator (cyclic pitch) corresponding to each operation of each condition.

This function allows the independent rate adjustments for the ailerons, elevator and pitch. Example of use %
5!$
4
!5	



 



 
%<),),4


  <


$

	 	4


-
$ 
	
$

4


 !


#
 :	 

  
4:

1




## Setting method

	"
	#  7
	4!

 
?%*#@
!
#  
$!
  "


%*#!
 	


7

! 

###  #
# 

!5	  
  
  !
   $
  ?"

@  7
??33@@
4
!5	 
$

 !

 

	
  7

	?@D?@4!

 
?"7@
!
# 





"
 
$ *For a description of the switch selection method, see the

!	

 

## #	

	
H
  0


!5	

!



#  
$!
%:
 

$

 	


  <
&C  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

<\7E	
 reset to the initial value. 

###  #
# 

:!
 

!


## 7	
	'F@'&&	
#  7
		
!!
4!

 
?#<0@
!
# 
$!
  "

D 	



7

! 

###  #
# 	

! !
 D  
  
  !
 *When mixing includes master side trim, select [ON] and when mixing does not include master trim, select [OFF]. 

### "

?"7%"/0<@
0
!





$

  	
# 

" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



##    H (Currently selected condition name)



### *



# 156 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> "


!




0
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT         $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# THROTTLE MIX

This function corrects slowing of engine speed




 or elevator operation. The method of applying clockwise or counterclockwise torque when

 Setting example %<)#/!5	

	

	

06

$	
 

$
,	

3$

	  
:

$


 	


$	 
1-  "

 ?#/##), 0<@  
 0
 !
 




$

 
 	 
# 
" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### (Currently selected condition name)



## Setting method

	"
	#  7
	4!

 
?%*#@
!
#  
$!
  "


%*#!
 	


7

! 

###  #
# 

!5	  
  
  !
   $
  ?"

@  7
??33@@
4
!5	 
$

 !

 

	
  7

	?@D?@4!

 
?"7@
!
# 




"

 $ *For a description of the switch selection method, see the

!	



## #	

	
H
  0


!5	

!



#  
$!
%:
 

$

 	


  <
&C  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

<\7E	
 reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 

!


## '

	
	
#  0


?0+,@
! 
# 
 $!
  "


$
!
 	
 
7

! 

###  *#0! : *




  )<!
&*

!$

	
  # 
 #   	
 
 $
!


 !
 *



# 157 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> "


!




0
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT         $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# PIT to RUD mixing (Revolution mixing)

Use this mix when you want to suppress the



 speed changes during pitch operation. Adjust so that the nose does not move in the rudder direction.

<Normal condition mixing curve>  #
!5	

 

 	!

       
 $
 
4
$$
$ 
4


$!

!5	 


4! 
	  
 : 
 
 $ 1%:!
 



  
$


!
 
!
 !#
:
$
 
  
 
$
 
! 
 





 -#
	
! 		! 
	  
$
! 		!
	 
!
 !:
$

 






 

 Note: When a GY Series or other heading hold

gyro is used, since correction is performed by the gyro, this mix is not utilized. If this function is used when the gyro operation mode is the AVCS mode, the neutral position will change.



## <Idle up condition mixing curve>  "

!5	



 	3$

H		
%: 
 

### "

?
<#8+@
0
!





$

 
 	
 #  (Currently selected condition name)

" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$



## Setting method

	"
	#  7
	4!

 
?%*#@
!
#  
$!
  "


%*#!
 	


7

! 

###  #
# 

!5	  
  
  !
   $


## ;	
	
#  0





	 
!:
# 
$!
  %:

 	

  <
&
1
9&C  %:!
	
&31CC1CC

<\7E	
 reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

:!
 

!
  
$
$


$

## "	
		  0

*
A
!
 #  
$!
 "


$
   	


# "


?A,"@
# 

# 158 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> "


!




0
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT         $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# GYRO mixing

This function used to adjust gyro sensitivity. The sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/&%$
	
7



 condition or the switch. (5 sensitivities)&
@
8
#&3~`qB$

"

?.A@
0
!





$

 
 	
# 

" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### Note: When using the [Gyro2]/[Gyro3] function,

assign [Gyro2]/[Gyro3] to any channel on the function screen. Always set to [--] both (Control) and (Trim) for the [Gyro] function at the Function menu in the Linkage menu.

(Currently selected condition name)



### 0


&  ?%*"@D?0@ .$


&  ?.A@D?0@ "
$




&
	


	
	 .
:!
 *D"

 #

 


	
 	
 "1  *When the rate switching setting of 
% conditions are not displayed. 

### #


 
	
 $
	 


  *When the rate switching setting of all the gyros is&=E'






### 7

.A 


4

 .A 

 
	 

 $$


# 159 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> Setting method,	
	

  0


	$


 
!
#  
$!
"


	$
 	

  ?.A@&7
 .A	
  ?0@&7

 .A	 
  #
# 	

	 $


!
<


3~

¤3~¥




&% and NORM modes.

## '

	
	

	,X	#$  0
 
   
 $
 !
 


!
#  
$!
"

 
$
!
 	


  ?%*"@&%*"!  ?0@&!!  # 
 #   	
 
 $
!


 !


## 
	
#  0




! 
# 
$ !
  %:

 	


  <
&BC  %:!
	
&C1CC

<  \7E    	   

sensitivity is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

 !


## &
	#	?(	
#  0


?33@
! 
 #   
 
 

 

"


 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the

!	

 

###  0




! 
# 
$ !
  %:
!
 	


  <
&C  %:!
	
&3-C-C

<  \7E    	   

sensitivity is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

 !
 

## A9(
	#	#
		"
#
	!" !"	&$	


		E .

4	



	

 /  	
  
  
 !




 1 "

 ?.A@  
 0
 !
 




$

 
  	
# 

- 0
 
   
 ?*+@ 
! 
# 

 



"


?"7@#
 # 

!


'¢! 

$


<



¢1!
?33@ #$


;?"@
 ?/D7",),*#@
 $


9?#A
,.A@?%#,@
2¢1«"

$2

$

F<
$2¢-20


 ?¢1@ 
!   
 #   





"


?¢-@ #
# 

 !
 

### SF : Top = #1 ● 

### #
! 
 "7

# 160 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> E0


?33@
!


#  B?"@
 ?/D7",),*#@
 !

#  G?#A
,.A@?%#,@
2¢-«" !2

$

	@
	@

 performed.&	
	 

### SF : Bottom = #2 ● 

### #
! 
 "7

# 161 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> "


!




0
 !
 	 RTN    HOME/EXIT         $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# GOVERNOR mixing

<


35,63~`B,6&3~`qB 	\+[ of the helicopter's rotor head. The rotor head speed



7


&`#
$ *When using an independent governor [ON]/[OFF] switch, connect the AUX([ON]/[OFF]) connector of the governor to &L
&L#3D$
 menu of the Linkage Menu. 

### Note: Always set (Control) and (Trim) to [--]

for [Governor] of the Function menu of the Linkage menu.

"

?.,@
0
!





$

 
 	
# 

" 0	 "

	! %:	

#
5$ 

### (Currently selected condition name)



### 8$

&  ?@D?$!@ "
$



 %*#D</&</
	


	
	 
0:!
 *D"





## Setting method

	"
	#  7
	4!

 
?</@
!
#  
$!
  "


%*#!
 	


7

! 

###  #
# 

!5	  
  
  !
   $
 7
 
 .
  	
! 
 
 
</


 %*# 
4 
 
$ !
  
 $
    $ 
  
 
 $	


*When the function is set ON/OFF at the governor setup

screen, the governor rpm setting channel end point servo travel and limit point are now initialized. <
	E&7#=E$
 initialized to 100 and the limit point is initialized to 155. <

E



servo travel is initialized to 100 and the limit point is initialized to 135. 

### 8

"
#

A," $



$ 
$





 # >!


!


## (	
H
  0




! 
# 
$ !
  %:
$! 	

  <
&9C19CC$!  %:!
 	
& 4 C11C 4 ECC'9CC$!<  \7E    	   

sensitivity is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

 !


## )	
	

  0


8<#
! 
# 
$ !
"


 	


  # 
 #   	
 
 $
!


 !


# 162 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
	
	



<¤¥



 * There is no change in the transmitter output even when the

£[='_£
&

	
 the governor. 3		7,0%3 necessary to change the settings on the governor for the low side 700 rpm mode. 

### 7

0+,
.


6 !
!
	
4
	
 
3



The chart below indicates the mode percentage and the corresponding RPM. 

## MODE 0% 50% 100% 110% 1000-2000rpm 1000rpm 1500rpm 2000rpm 2100rpm 1000-2500rpm 1000rpm 1500rpm 2500rpm 2700rpm 1000-3500rpm 1000rpm 1500rpm 3500rpm 3900rpm 700-2000rpm 700rpm 1500rpm 2000rpm 2100rpm 700-2500rpm 700rpm 1500rpm 2500rpm 2700rpm 700-3500rpm 700rpm 1500rpm 3500rpm 3900rpm



## &
	#	?(	
#  0


?33@
! 
 #   
 
 

 

"


 *For a description of the switch selection method, see the

!	

 

###  0




! 
# 
$ !
  %:
!
 	


  <
&CC$!  %:!
	
&3-C-C3-CC-CC$!

<  \7E    	   

sensitivity is reset to the initial value.) 

###  #
# 

 !
 

## <EXAMPLE>RPM rate is changed with a !"	&$	


		E .

4 
0 
  

 

	

 /  	
  
  
 !




 1"

?.,@
0
!





$

 
 	
# 

- 0
 
   
 ?*+@ 
! 
# 

 



"


?"7@#
 # 

!
 %?</@
?%*#@

'¢! 

$


<



¢1!
?33@ #$


;?"@
 ?/D7",),*#@
 $


9?0+,@?%#,@
2¢1«"

$2

$

F<
$2¢-20




?¢1@
!
#  





"


 ?¢-@#
# 

 !
%?</@
?%*#@ 

### SF : Top = #1 ● 

### #
! 
 "7

# 163 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> E0


?33@
!


#  B?"@
 ?/D7",),*#@
 !

#  G?0+,@?%#,@
2¢-«" !2

$

	 @     @ 
 
 
  performed.&	
	 

### SF : Bottom = #2 ● 

### #
! 
 "7

# 164 <Appendix> "


!




!
 

 	 RTN    HOME/ EXIT $
 

### <SensorTouchTM>

RETURN 

# TIMER ST1/ST2 #!





## The Timer function may be set for any desired time, i.e. engine run time, specified times for competitions, etc. Two independent timers are provided for your use. The timers are stored independently with each model, meaning that when you switch between model setups, the timer associated with the new model is brought up automatically.

The timers may be set to start and stop from the motion of any switch or stick. You may set the ON and OFF directions freely. Each timer has a capacity of up to 59 minutes 59 seconds. Each timer may be set for count-down (DOWN mode) or count up (UP mode) operation with a target time or for count up to 99 hours 59 minutes (HOUR mode).

If a target time is set and the timer reaches the set time, a buzzer sound for each count is generated. Countdown timers sound one short beep during the last twenty seconds and two short beeps during the last ten seconds before reaching the target, then a long tone at the target time, and continue counting with displaying a minus (-) sign. Count-up timers also beep the last twenty and ten seconds, beep the target time, and keep counting upwards until shut down.

A mode which sounds an alarm each minute of the time remaining up to the timer alarm time can be selected. The HOUR mode is convenient when used in engine maintenance period and other long-term measurements.

* When the HOUR mode is set, "xx (hour): xx (minute)" is displayed on the count time display. Seconds are not displayed. * When the HOUR mode is set, ":" blinks each second during timer operation. * When the HOUR mode is set, the alarm function is inhibited.



### "

"#1"#-
!




 
 
$ 

  
  	
# 

" 0	 "

	! %:	

TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4 

## "Vibes" type If the following types are selected, the transmitter will vibrate during the warning.

# 165 <Appendix> Timer setting)	
@!	
	
#  0


?0+,@
! 
# 
 $!
  "


!
 	

 
#   ?8
@&8$!
  ?+7@&+!
  ?/8@&/!
!


## 7
	
	
#  0


?%)%0@
! 
# 
 $!
  "

!
 	

  ?CC@&?CC@&?!@&?
@  #
# 

:!
 

!


## !"	
#  0



!



4


$

 	
# "


 
 [For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch

Setting Method] located on the next page.] 

###  ?"#%#@&"  ?"#
@&"$  ?,",#@&



## 
	
#  0


?0,0A@
! 
# 
 $!
  "


!
 	

 
#   ?@&0
!  ?@&0



!



 
$


!



## 	
	!""		
	

	

"	 
	
	


E  *	


		
2  2 

2  2 

2  2&%!
!

!
 $
 ! !
  *
 !


2  2&%!
!

!
 
!	$
!!
 

## 7
	

  #!
"#1"#-

D$$
 

$
3


D$  #

!
4$


$
3






4!


?,",#@ $
!



 # 

# 166 <Appendix> The various functions used in the T14SG can be activated by a switch. For the purposes of this manual, a stick position, VR position, etc. shall be commonly referred to as a switch in all cases. That

"




5!$




## Q"
	!"		

 When switch was selected, ON/OFF position setting is also performed.

*The ON/OFF setting state of each position is displayed. 

### 17
	

D


	4


!

 
#  
$!
"
D $ 	

 *ON/OFF display blinks. 

### -7

# 
4
D  
	  	
 # 
 "1 $
	
 '#

$


	

4!




?D@
$ 



#  

## Q"
	G		

		G	

 When a stick, trim lever, or knob is used as a switch, two operation modes can be selected:

17
	

!
4

!
 
   ?0+,@ 
!   
 #     
  $ !
 " 
 $  
 !
    	
  	


!
 
	
 	
# 

  0
&?)<@D?"A0@

* Set the ON/Off point by the method described on the next page. 

## !"	

 18


!



		  
     


#  *The switch blinks. 

### -#

$


	

4!
 

?/D7",),*#@
$ 



#   4!


?D@ 
D$
	

  	
# 



## 


	
	
#
 %)#,%#, !
&?@D?@ 10


?%)#,%#,@
!


# 
 $!
 -*	

!

 

	

 *The mode display blinks. 

### '#
# #
"1 

$
	
 ;#

$


	

4!
 

?D@
$
 


#  

# !"	
#	
"

!"	



When a switch is selected at a mixing function, etc., the selection screen shown below is called. is, whenever the manual indicates that something is operated via a switch, it is possible for the user to activate this setting via a stick, stick position, etc.

# 167 <Appendix> '

	


The operation modes available when stick, trim lever, or knob was selected are described below.

9

	
	9BF

This mode sets ON/OFF to the left or right (up or down) with the set point as the reference.


	
	X

Left and right (up and down) operations are symmetrical near the neutral position. For instance, when you want to switch D/R with the aileron stick, when the stick is moved to the left or right, DR can be turned on at the same position. "#	"
	'F@'	 The ON/OFF point can be shifted. ON/OFF at a free position can be changed.

	
& 7
	
&

[Setting method] 14


!




?
"@
! -0

4!

4 
 $	

 # #
$
 '#

$


	

4!




?D@
$ 



# 

# 168 <Appendix> FUTABA CORPORATION Phone: +81 475 32 6982, Facsimile: +81 475 32 6983 1080 Yabutsuka, Chosei-mura, Chosei-gun, Chiba-ken, 299-4395, Japan ©FUTABA CORPORATION 2012, 10 (1) 

## 9#	  %+& 7
  
 
 4 
   &7


4
   ,3& 7
 
  
 
  


4




## !"	
	

 10


?"<.),@
!


# 
 $!
 -"


?).<*@ 	



 *[LOGIC] display blinks. 

### '#
# 	

 	!
 )	
	





## 9#	
	

 10


	!

!


# 
 $!
 -"

 
 	 !
  	 
 
?%+4,3@ *The mode display blinks. 

### '#
# 	

 	!




## !"	

 1"


	

$







$
$
 $	


 #

$


	

4!
 

?"7<#*/@
$
 


#  

## 9#	!"	2	

		$ The logic switch function lets you turn operation on and off by combining two switches.

# E XHIBIT 

# 2©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 1 

# A2 Flight Control System
User Manual V 1. 20

November , 2014 Revision

Thank you for purchasing DJI products. Please strictly follow these steps to mount and connect this system on your

aircraft, install the PC Assistant Software on your computer
, as well as install ing the DJI Assistant App on your

mobile device

.

Please regularly check the web page of corresponding product s on our website 

## www.dji.com , which is updated regularly. Product information, technical updates and manual corrections will be av ailable on this website. Due to unforeseen changes or product upgrades, the information contained in this manual is subject to change

without notice.

* This manual is for basic assembly and configuration; you can obtain more details and advanced instructi ons when
using the A ssistant S oftware. To assure you have the latest information, please visit our website and download the

latest manual and current software version.

If you have any problem s that you cannot solve during usage, please contact your author ized dealer.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 2 

## Content

INTRODUCTION

................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 4

P RODUCT 

## I NTRODUCTION



## ................................ ................................ ................................ ........ 4
I N THE 

## B O X



## ................................ ................................ ................................ ........................... 4
E QUIPMENT 

## P REPARED BY 

## U SERS



## ................................ ................................ .............................. 4
S YSTEM 

## I NTRODUCTION



## ................................ ................................ ................................ ........... 5
S YMBOL 

## I NSTRUCTION



## ................................ ................................ ................................ ............ 5

1 ASSEMBLY AND CONFI GURATION

................................ ................................ ................ 6

1.1 H ARDWARE 

## I NSTALLATION AND 

## C ONNECTION



## ................................ ................................ ........ 6 1.1.1 Mixer Type Supported

................................ ................................ ........................... 6 1.1.2 Hardware Connection Diagram

................................ ................................ ............. 7 1.1.3 Important for Assembly and Connect ion

................................ ............................... 7
1.2 S OFTWARE 

## I NSTALLATION AND 

## C ONFIGURATION



## ................................ ................................ ... 15 1.2.1 Installing Driver and Assistant Software

................................ ............................. 15 1.2.2 Configure using Assistant Software on a PC

................................ ........................ 16 1.2.3 Configure the control mode switch

................................ ................................ ..... 17 1.2.4 Configuration Checking

................................ ................................ ....................... 19 1.2.5 Tools

................................ ................................ ................................ .................... 20
1.3 C OMPASS 

## C ALIBRATION



## ................................ ................................ ................................ ... 22

2 BASIC FLYING

................................ ................................ ................................ ............. 23

2.1 C ONTROL 

## M ODE 

## I NSTRUCTION



## ................................ ................................ ......................... 23
2.2 F LYING 

## E NVIRONMENT 

## R EQUIREMENTS



## ................................ ................................ .............. 25
2.3 C HECK 

## L IST BEFORE 

## F LYING



## ................................ ................................ ............................... 25
2.4 P OWER ON AND 

## C HECK



## ................................ ................................ ................................ ... 26
2.5 S TART 

## M OTORS 

## M ETHODS



## ................................ ................................ ............................... 26
2.6 B ASIC 

## F LYING 

## T EST



## ................................ ................................ ................................ ......... 28

3 PROTECTION FUNCTIO NS SETTING

................................ ................................ ............ 30

3.1 F A IL 

## S AFE



## ................................ ................................ ................................ ...................... 30
3.2 L OW 

## V OLTAGE 

## P ROTECTION



## ................................ ................................ .............................. 31

4 ADVANCED FEATURES

................................ ................................ ................................ 33

4 .1 IOC (I NTELLIGENT 

## O RIENTATION 

## C ONTROL 

## ) FUNCTION



## ................................ .......................... 33
4.1.1IOC

................................ ................................ ................................ ........................ 33©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 3



## 4.1.2 Cruise Control

................................ ................................ ................................ ...... 37
4.2 S ERVO 

## G IMBAL FUNCTION



## ................................ ................................ ................................ 39
4.3 F LIGHT 

## L IMITS



## ................................ ................................ ................................ ............... 39 4.3.1 Max Height, Radius Limits & Home Fence

................................ ........................... 39 4.3.2 Flight Limits of Special Areas

................................ ................................ ............... 41 4.3.3 Conditions of Flight Limits

................................ ................................ ................... 43
4.4 P

ARACHUTE 

## F UNCTION



## ................................ ................................ .............................. 44
4.5 G EAR FUNCTION



## ................................ ................................ ................................ ............ 44
4.6 A TTITUDE 

## C ONTROL 

## W HEN 

## O NE 

## M OTOR 

## O UTPUT 

## F AILS



## ................................ ........................ 45
4.7 DJI A SSISTANT 

## A PP 

## U SAGE



## ................................ ................................ ............................... 45

APPENDIX

................................ ................................ ................................ ..................... 48

LED INDICATOR DESCRIPTIO NS



## ................................ ................................ ................................ 48
S PECIFICATIONS



## ................................ ................................ ................................ ................... 49

FAQ

................................ ................................ ................................ .............................. 50

U SE WITH OTHER 

## DJI PRODUCTS



## ................................ ................................ ............................. 50
C HANNEL 

## M APPING 

## I NSTRUCTIONS FOR 

## PC A SSISTANT 

## S OFTWARE



## ................................ ................ 52
R ECOMMENDED 

## M APPING FOR 

## F UTABA 

## T RANSMITTER 

## (M ODE 

## 2) U SER



## ................................ ......... 54
S ETTINGS OF GAIN VALU ES FOR 

## Y OUR 

## R EFERENCE



## ................................ ................................ ....... 54
T HE 

## T RANSMITTER SETUP OF 

## FUTABA

................................ ................................ .................... 54

DISCLAIMER

................................ ................................ ................................ ................. 56

TRADEMARK

................................ ................................ ................................ ................ 56©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 4 

# Introduction Product Introduction

The DJI A2 Multi

- Rotor stabilization controller is a complete flight system for various multi

- rotor platform s for
commercial and industrial aerial photography . Based on the technology and design philosophy of DJI’s Ace
series of high

- performance controllers, the A2 offers you a brand new flight experience. Its flight mode provides

a seamless transition for curre nt Ace One, WKM AP professionals. A2 features includes : (1) I ntegrated with high

- precision sensor components and a high

- performance GPS R eceiver

. (2) U tilizes high quality components precisely calibrated with temperature compensation in all gyros and
sensors, indu stry renowned flight algorithm in autopilot and UAV field.
(3) Designed with b uilt

- in vibration absorption , no extra mount frame or vibration absorption pad is required. (4) P rovide high precision control and high performance handling experience. (5) Based on the DESS T technology , it has a built

- in 16

- channel Receiver, and supports DSM2 satellite receiver. (6) Optional DJI D

- BUS Adapter can be used with a traditional Receiver.



## In the Box

C ontroller Unit
(Built

- in Receiver DR16) PMU(Power M anage ment unit) IMU(Inertia M ea surement U nit)

LED

- BT

- I GPS

- COMPASS PRO A ccessories

M icro

- USB Cable (1)

S ervo Cables (2)

GPS Bracket

D ouble side s t icky pads

. 

## Equipment Prepared by User s

Aircraft ( Take Quad

- rotor for example:
Red is nose, and B lack is rear ) Transmitter
( Take Mode2 for example ) Others

Battery

DJI D

- BUS Adapter

Mobile Device©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 5 

## System Introduction

The A2 flight control system use s the Controller Unit at its core, which is connected with the IMU,

GPS

- COMPASS PRO
、 LED

- BT

- I
、 PMU and ESCs to complete the system. T he system can achieve the
height

- lock and position

- lock functions by using the IMU and the GPS, to control the aircraft. Please carry out the following procedures to finish assembly, configurat ion and flight

- testing

.



## Symbol Instruction General Symbol

Forbidden(Important) Cautions Tip s Reference

GPS Satellite number D istance T X signal g ood T X signal lost

Roll to left Roll to right P itch up P itch down



## LED Symbol
( N ) N=1 N=2 N=3 N=4 N=6 N=20 N= ∝

Meaning One Blink Two Blinks Three Blinks Four Blinks Six Blinks Twenty Blinks Continuous

Blinks

e.g. ( 3 ) means three Red blinks.

( ∝ ) LED blinks yellow and green alternatively.

( N ) N= ∝ Meaning Continuous Solid on

e.g. ( ∝ ) means Continuous Blu e Solid on. Configure the system us in g A2 Assistant software

.

Basic flying test FailSafe and Low

- voltage settings A dvanced f unctions: IOC, Gimbal, Gear M ount the A2 flight control system on your aircraft finish connection.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 6 

# 1 Assembly and C onfiguration

F or hardware installation, software configuration and compass calibration please adhere to the following

sections.



## 1.1 Hardware Installation and Connection

(1) P lease adhere to “ 1.1.1 Mixe r Type Supported ” to choose a mixer type and assemble your aircraft. (2) P lease adhere to both “ 1.1.2 Hardware Connection Diagram ” and “ 1.1.3 Important for Assembly and

Connection ” to install and connect all units on your aircraft.



### 1.1.1 Mix er Type Supported

F ollowing Mixe r Type s are supported.

The direction of the arrow in diagram indicates the rotation di rection of the motor/propeller.

For coaxial propellers: Blue propeller is at TOP ; Red propeller is at Bottom . Otherwise all propellers

are at to p.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 7 

### 1 .1.2 Hardware Connection Diagram

1.1.3 Important for Assembly and Connection
This section describes all device port function s , assembly requirement s , connection requirements and tips during usage. Also the linking proce dures between the built

- in Receiver DR16 and your Transmitter. Please read
all information below carefully, especially if you are a first time user. 

### (1) Controller Unit

The Control ler Unit is the core component of the A2 flight control system:
(1) M1~M8 are used to connect to the ESCs of the aircraft. (2) The built

- in Receiver DR16 is based on DJI DESST technology, which can be used with the Futaba FASST

series and DJI DESST series Transmitter.
(3) CAN1 and CAN2 ports are working independent ly and should connect to diffe rent modules. (4) 4 independent and c onfigurable outputs. (5) I t is compatible with the external Receiver, e.g. DSM2 satellite Receiver.
(6) Use the optional DJI DBUS Adapter to support the traditional receiver.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 8 

### Port Description

Mount ing Requirement s :
Install the C ontroller U nit in the proper position to make sure the ports are accessible. No specified direction is
required. Place the antennas in an open space under th e aircraft, DO NOT block them. Position the heads of

two antennas at a 90

- degree angle. DO NOT bend or wind them.



### Receiver System

The A2 flight control system can use its own built

- in Receiver, and also can support external receiver s . Whatever

type of Receiver is used, please make sure that the Receiver and Transmitter is linked correctly before use. 

### A. B uilt

- in Receiver

For e nhanc ing the system integration and reliability
, the A2 is integrated with a 2.4G receiver based on
frequency hopping technology. The built

- in Receiver can be used with the Transmitter of Futaba FASST s eries

or DJI DESST series after linking. F or users, you are only asked to carry out the link procedures, no extra
requirement for connection

. Please carry out the following procedures to finish the Link process , and the configuration in the A2 Assistant

so ftware

- >Basic

- >R/C

- >Receiver Type

. Select the DR16 option. During use, you may see the following LED indication, please do the operation according to the table below.

LED Description Operation
( ∝ ) Signal from T ransmitter has been detected by the R eceiver, but not matched. Link operation required

( ∝ ) No T ransmitter signal is received, e.g. the flight control system is power ed on but the Transmitter is power ed off. Switch on

( ∝ ) The R eceiver an d T ransmitter have been link ed to each other successfully

. C an work normally©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 9

T he DR16 Receiver is compatible with the Futaba transmitters which have optional FASS MODE MULT,

MLT2 or 7CH. U sers can find out more available Fu taba transmitters and configuration requirements

refer to the FAQ

- >The Transmitter setup of FUTABA

.



### B. DSM2 S atellite R eceivers

If us ing DSM2 satellite R eceiver s , please follow the diagram for connection, set the R eceiver referring to your

R eceiver m anual, and select the Receiver type as DSM2 in the A ssistant software

- >Basic

- >R/C

- > Receiver Type

.

Notes for the DSM2 users :

 T here is n o need to enable the Fail S afe function in the Transmitter

. I f the Receiver loses the sig n al
from the Transmitter, the controller unit will enter into FailSafe automatically, and the aircraft will©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 10 hover or Go

- home as configur e in the FailSafe in the Assistant software.

 When using the dual

- mode Transmitter, please set the transmiting mode as DS M2 in SYSTEM SET

UP

- >FRAME RATE

- >MODE, which should not be DSMX.

 Support DSM2 satellite Receivers used with all S PEKTRUM Transmitters, e.g. DX6I DX7S DX8
DX18 etc., as well as JR Transmitter s , e.g. DXS9II DXS11

. 

### C. S

- BUS Receivers

If us ing S

- BUS R eceive r s please follow the diagram for connection, set the R eceiver referring to your R eceiver
manual, and select the Receiver type as D

- BUS in the A ssistant software

- >Basic

- >R/C

- > Receiver Type

.

Notes for the S

- BUS users :

 It is n o need to enable the FailSafe function in the Transmitter

. O nce the Receiver loses the signals from the Transmitter, the controller unit will enter into FailSafe automatically, and the

aircraft will hover or Go

- home as configurations of the FailSafe in th e Assistant software.


### D. PPM Receivers

If us ing PPM R eceiver s please follow the diagram for connection, set the R eceiver referring to your R eceiver
manual, and select the Receiver type as PPM in the A ssistant software

- >Basic

- >R/C

- > Receiver Type

.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 11 

### E. Traditional Receivers

If us ing Traditional R eceiver s , the DJI D

- BUS Adapter is required. Please follow the diagram for connection, set

the R eceiver referring to your R eceiver manual, and select the Receiver type as D

- BUS in the A ssistant

software

- >Basic

- >R/C

- > Receiver Type

.

N otes for the traditional receiver users:

 W hen using the traditional receiver which doesn ’ t have endpoint adjustment operations to set

FailSafe in the U channel
, the Go

- H ome switch is recommended and users can use it to trigger

the FailSafe

.
 C onfigure the FailSafe function of your transmitter and receiver according to its instructions,

set the FailSafe position of the Go

- Home switch in the position triggering the FailSafe function

. I f it is configured correctly as mentioned above , the FailSafe function will be activated
automatically if the receiver loses the signal from the transmitter.

 U sers can get more information about the FailSafe function referring to 3.1 FailSafe in this

manual and the help text in the Assistant software.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 12 

### (2) IMU ( Inertial Measurement Unit ) :

Built

- in inertial sensor s , for the measurement of aircraft attitude ; built

- in p ressure sensor for the detection of

aircraft altitude. Should be connected to the CAN1 port of the Control ler Unit, and be mount ed according to
the required location and orientation

. The IMU has been calibrated before delivery , it should be used under the
specified temperature ; otherwise the temperat ure may have an effect on the IMU performance.
Working environment temperature : - 5 o C ~60 o C Storage environment temperature : <60 o C

O rientatio n Requirement s :
P lease mount the IMU as one of the following options. C onfigure in the A2 Assistant software

- >Basi c - >Mount

- >
IMU

, and select the matched option.

Loc atio n Requirement s :

(1) The top side should be facing up. DO NOT mount upside

- down. (2) DO NOT cover the ventil ation holes, keep them unblocked and clean. (3) Take heat preservation measures if working in cold weather.
(1) Mount the IMU at a low vibrat ion position and the sides of the IMU should be precisely parallel

to the aircraft body. B ased on our experience , there is less vibrat ion near the aircraft’s center
of gravity

. (2) NOT water

- proof or oil

- proof. (3) Check the double faced adhesive tape regularly to make sure that the IMU is fixed firmly.

There is a CAN

- Bus connector , which can be used to connect to the GPS

- COMPASS PRO or other DJI product

.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 13 

### (3) GPS

- COMPASS PRO

GPS

- COMPASS PRO module has a b uilt

- in GPS and compass. The compass is used for geomagnetic field

measurement . It should be mount ed according to the required location and orientation

. Compass calibration is
required before use

. DO NOT use and store the compass i n the ferromagnetic material environment

.



### Mount ing Procedure : a) Use the epoxy resin AB glue to assemble the GPS bracket first. The longest one is recommended.

b) Mount the bracket on the aircraft first, and then fix the GPS

- COMPASS PRO o n the plate of the bracket ( using the 3M sticky pads provided ). 

### Mounting Position :

Usage Requirements
(1) The DJI logo should be fac ing the sky, with the orientation arro w pointing directly to the nose

direction ; otherwise it may lead to take off failure

. (2) Fly the aircraft in an open space without buildings or trees; otherwise it may have an effect on

the GPS.

(3) The c ompass is sensitive to magnetic interference, should be f a r away from electronic devices
, otherwise it may lead to abnormal flying

. (4) Please always keep the compass module away from magnet fields

. Otherwise it may damage
the compass module and lead the aircraft to work abnormally or even be out of control.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 14 

### (4) PMU ( Power Management Unit)

T he PMU provides dual BEC s ( Battery Eliminator Circuit ) : (1) PW port outputs power for the whole Flight Control System with current no more than 2A

. (2) PX port outputs power (3A@5V) and V

- SEV signal using the low voltage protection functio n.
I n addition , there are two CAN

- Bus port s for LED

- BT

- I con nection and other DJI product s (e.g. DJI 2.4G Data
Link). 

### Port Description

Mount ing Requirements:

C hoose a ventil ated pla ce to mount the PMU for cooling , no mountin g orientation requirement.



### (5) LED

- BT

- I

T he LED

- BT

- I has integrate d LED Indicator, Bluetooth and USB port:
(1) The LED is mainly for f light control system status indicat ion during flying (e.g. Control Mode).
(2) Bluetooth is used for real

- time communication with your mobile device (e.g. iPhone), to realize parameter
configuration on a mobile device. F or parameter configuration using a mobile device, it is requir ed to install the DJI Assistant App on the mobile device. When you mount the LED

- BT

- I, please make sure the

side with ANT LOGO is unsheltered after mount ing. (3) In addition, there is a Micro

- USB port, make sure it is mounted for convenient connection. 

### Port Description :

Mount ing Requirement s: Mount in a good place to make sure the LED is visible during flying. Antenna of Bluetooth s hould be unobstruct ed

.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 15 

## 1.2 Software Installation and Configuration

Please configure the A2 flight control system in the Assistant Software according to the following instructions. Users are required to conf igure every item within the “Basic” page when use the A2 flight control system for the

first time. 

### 1.2.1 Installing Driver and Assistant Software Installing and running on Windows

1. Download driver installer and Assistant Software installer in EXE format from t he download page of A2

on the DJI website.

2. Connect the A2 flight control system to a PC via a Micro

- USB cable. The Micro

- USB port of the A2 flight control system is on the LED

- BT

- I module.

3. Run the driver installer and follow the prompts to finish in stallation.

4. Next, run the assistant software installer and follow the prompts to finish installation.

5. Double click the A2 icon on your Windows desktop to launch the software.

The i nstaller in EXE format only supports Windows operating systems (Win XP, Win7, Win8 (32 or 64 bit)).



### Install ing and run ning on Mac OS X

1. Download the A ssistant S oftware installer in DMG format from the download page of A2 on the DJI

website.

2. Run the installer and follow the prompts to finish installation.

3. When launching for the first time if use Launchpad to run the A2 Assistant software, Launchpad will not allow access because the software has not been reviewed by Mac App Store.

4. L ocate the A2 icon in the Finder, p ress the Control key and then click the A2 icon (or right

- click the A2 icon using a mouse). Choose Open from the shortcut menu, click O pen in the prompt dialog box and

the n the software will launch

. 5. After the first successful launch, direct launching of the software can be achiev ed by double

- clicking the

A2 icon in the Finder or using Launchpad.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 16

Installer in DMG format supports only Mac OS X 10. 9 or above.

Usage of A2 Assistant software on Mac OS X and Windows are exactly the same. The Assistant
software pages appear in other places of this manual are on the Windows for example.


### 1.2.2 Configur e using Assistant Software on a PC

A 2 flight control system can takes power via t he USB port during c o nfiguration, no additional battery is required.
N ote that the USB port can supply power no more than 500mA, an ad ditional battery is necessary if connection
failure or intermittent working

. R un the assistant software, and follow the buil t

- in guide to carry out the configuration. Note that you may be asked to register for first time use.



### 1. View 2. Restore &Upgrade 3.Set 4.Check

Click “Info” to view

user information

and software

version etc. Enter “Tools” to restore default
settings. And check whether the

firmware is the latest. Enter “ Basic” page

. Set the Aircraft
, Mounting
, RC
, Gain”

in each tab. Enter “View”
page to check all

basic settings.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 17

“ RC

STATUS ”
description Normal : the transmitter and receiver are linked and communicating well.

Disconnect : t he A2 Flight Control System is power ed o n, but the transmitter is power ed off

. RC

- LOST : RC signal is lost ( e.g. the transmitter is turned off after power on ) or the receiver

is send ing F/S signals ( e.g. the aircraft flies out of the range which transmitter is

controllable ).

The firmware version and the Assistant Softwa re version should be match ed when using the software to configure the A2 flight control system, otherwise the software will not work. I t ’ s recommended to keep the firmware version and Assistant Software version up to date to avoid this issues

.



### 1.2.3 Conf igure the control mode switch Users should configure the control mode switch in the Assistant software in the following page. Only the control
mode switch has been set correctly, the control mode displayed in the left bottom corner will be the same to the
control mode pointed by the cursor o n the channel U.

C onfiguration steps Ex amble s

S tep 1. Power on your Transmitter, map a 3

- position

switch on the transmitter to the U channel of

Controller Unit as the control mode switch, of
which two positions are de fault as Atti. Mode

a nd GPS Atti. Mode and the third position is optional, users can set as Atti. Mode or
Manual Mode.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 18

S tep 2. Toggle the control mode switch to its three
positions, accordingly the cursor will move to

some control mode.

S tep 3.

Power off the Transmitter , the FailSafe will be
enabled and the cursor will point to any area

out of the control mode s

.

S tep 4. If all steps above are realized, that indicates the

control mode switch is set successfully

. Important

I n step 2, if the cursor doesn ’ t point to the correct control mode area (e.g. the following figures ) , that indicates
abnormal control mode switch configuration. U sers must re
- configure the Endpoint and FailSafe functions in the Transmitter to make the cursor point to the ri ght control mode and the according area s become blue.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 19 

### 1.2.4 Configuration Checking

*Fig. above for reference only, please adhere to actual GUI.

Check List Description 1 Check the IMU orientation direction

.
2 Check the Mixer Type of aircraft.

Make sure the motors are rotating normally , and p ropeller installation is in correct direction. 3 The Receiver type is correct

. 4 、 5 Check the basic and attitude gains

.
6 Move the sticks to test whether the cursors moves following the sticks. T oggle the “ U ” switch to

test the control mode setting.

7 ~ 

# ○ 11 A dvanced configuration, users can configure it according to their requirements after reading the

manual.



# ○ 12 Check the Channel Map between the T ransmitter and A2 flight control system

.

1 2

3

4 5

6 7

8

9

10

11

1 2©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 20 

### 1.2.5 Tools

1 Config

E xport or import the tuning parameters and resto re the default setting and reset the BTU module. 2 Sensors

Read gyroscope, acceleration and compass sensor value. 3 IMU Calibration
Calibrate IMU base d on the gyroscope and accelerati on sensor reading s from Assistant. C alibrate is needed , when:

 Gyroscope Mo d value exceeds 1.5.

 Acceleration Mod value below 0.98 or exceeds 1.02. Steps to follow when calibrating IMU:

1. Go to IMU Calibration section after power ing on A2, wait until A2 enters “ Ready ” status

. 2. Click “ Calibration ”, take note of the following warning message:

Place the IMU on a stationary and horizontal surface and ensure A2 logo faces upward.

3. Click “ OK ” to proceed.

1

2

3 4©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 21 4 Device Information and Connection Status

A ll devices that connected to the A2 f light controller are highlighted, however, disconnecte d devices appear grey. Single click a highlighted device to upgrade its firmware. You can also upgrade all firmware by clicking the

“ Upgrade All ” button.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 22 

## 1.3 Compass Calibration

The Compass can assistant the GPS to position the aircraft, which is very i mportant during flight. As we know, the compass is very sensitive to electromagnetic interference , which will cause abnormal compass data, and lead

to poor flight performance or even flight failure

. Compass Calibration MUST be done for first time use.
It i s recommended to calibrate the compass outdoor s after the C ontroller U nit finds 7 or more GPS satellites

. Regular calibration enables the compass to keep optimal performance

. 

### Calibration Caution s (1) DO NOT calibrate your compass where there is strong magne tic interference, such as magnetite, car park, and steel reinforcement under the ground. (2) DO NOT carry ferromagnetic materials with you during calibration, such as keys or cell phones. (3) Compass Calibration is very important; otherwise the flight control syst em cannot work. 

## Calibration Procedures
Choose an open space to carry out the following procedures.



### S ituations that require recalibration
S ituations Descriptions
Compass D ata abnormal LED blinks yellow and green alternative ly ( ( ∝ ) )

. F lying field altered Flying field has changed over a long distance

.

M echanical alteration T he mount ing position of GPS

- COMPASS PRO module changes.

E lectronic units such as C ontroller U nit , CAN

- HUB, battery etc. have been added,

removed
, remou nted or other alterations.

Mechanical structures of the aircraft has changed

D rifting during fly ing E vident drifts occurred in flight such as the aircraft doesn ’ t fly straight

A ttitude errors LED often blinks error indicator when the aircraft turns a round.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 23 

# 2 Basic flying

Read this section before basic flight testing

.



## 2.1 Control Mode Instruction

The aircraft performs differently wh en using different control modes. Please read the following table to know

the different control modes, which may help you to achieve a more involved flight experience.

Control Mode GPS ATTI. Mode ATTI. Mode Manual Mode

Command Linearity YES

Yaw Control the aircraft to rotate in clockwise and counter clockwise direction. Maximum rudder
angular velocity 150°/s

Rol l and Pitch Aircraft attitude control; Mid point of s tick is for 0 ̊ attitude,

and its endpoint is 35 ̊. Max

- angular velocity is 150°/s. No attitude angle limit

.

Throttle Aircraft height control

. Maintain the altitude best above 1

meter from ground when the throttle stick is in mid position

. No altitude locking when the throttle stick is in mid position.
All Sticks
Released Lock position if GPS signal is
adequate. Only attitude stabilizing.

No position l ock ing. Keep original attitude

.

GPS Lost Once GPS signal lost the flight

control syst em will enter ATTI

. Mode aut omatic ally

. R eturn to
GPS ATT1. Mode after GPS signal

has recovered for 2 seconds. --- ---

IOC Supported CL/HL/POI / BTM CL None

Assign a 3

- position switch of the transmitter as the control mode switch

. The position

- 1 is defaulted as “ GPS

ATTI. Mode ” and the position

- 2 is “ ATTI. Mode ”

. T he position

- 3 can be set as “ Manual Mode ” or “ ATTI. Mode ” in

A2 assistant software.

C ontrol M ode S witch position

- 1 position

- 2 position

- 3

Configur able
C ontrol M ode GPS ATTI. Mode ATTI

. Mode * ATTI

. Mode * Manual Mo de

FailSafe
Protection The flight control system will enter FailSafe

Mode if the Transmitter signal is lost and no matter if Transmitter signal recovers or not,
system will not exit FailSafe mode automatically. The flight control system will enter
FailSaf e Mode if the Transmitter signal is
lost and the system will exit FailSafe once

the signal recovers.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 24

GPS I nvolved YES NO

Low

- voltage
Protection LED alert with D e s cending or Go Home & Landing precautions Only LED alert

E nvironment

recommended Open flyin g field;

Good GPS signal Narrow Space; GPS signal bad R egain control in emergency

The difference between ATTI . Mode of position

- 2 and ATTI . Mode of position

- 3 is that they are working differently
in p rotection situations.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 25 

## 2. 2 Flying E nvironment R equir emen t s

(1) Before use of the product, please accept some flight training (Using a simulator to practice flying, getting instruction from a professional person, etc.).
(2) D O NOT fly in bad weather, such as rain or wind (more than moderate breeze) or fog. (3) The fl ying field should be open without tall buildings or other obstacles; the buildings of steel
structure will interfere with the compass. (4) Keep the aircraft away from obstacles, crowds, power lines, trees, lakes and rivers etc.
(5) Try to avoid interference betwee n the remote control T ransmitter and other wireless equipment. (No base station or cell tower around)
(6) The flight control system can’t work at the South Pole and the North Pole.
(7) All parts must be kept out of the reach of children to avoid CHOKE HAZARD; if a child
accidentally swallows any part you should immediately seek medical assistance.



## 2. 3 Check List before Flying

Double check the following list, otherwise, if any one of the following item s is wrong it may lead to flight accident

.

(1) A ll parts are in good condition , no ageing or damaged components (2) Motor rotating direction
(3) Propeller mounting direction
(4) Mixer Type set in assistant software
(5) IMU and GPS

- COMPASS PRO mounting direction (6) T ransmitter channel mapping and sticks move ment direction correct (7) Compass calibration (8) ESC connection
(9) IMU and GPS

- COMPASS PRO firmly mounted

In addition , check the following items to make sure the system can work.

(1) The Transmitter battery is fully charged.
(2) The aircraft battery is fully charged. (3) Do not over load the aircraft.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 26 

## 2. 4 Power on and C heck

(1) Control mode LED indicator

Power on the Transmitter then the flight control system

. Toggle the control mode switch to different positions.

Control M ode LED indicator

Control Mode

Switch GPS ATTI. Mode ATTI . Mode Man ual Mode

LED (Stick not in midpoint (2) ) (Stick not in midpoint (2) ) No LED indicator

Set Put the Control Mode switch to GPS position for basic flying test.

Note: when the GPS signal LED indicator is bad or worst ( (2) or (3) ) and last s for more

th an 3secs, the flight control system will enter into ATTI

. Mode.

(2) GPS signal LED indicator GPS signal indicat ion blinks after every Control mode indicat ion

. We s uggest flying when GPS satellites are more
than 5. GPS signal LED indicator

Worst ( < 5 ) : (3) Bad ( = 5 ) : (2) Well ( = 6 ) : (1) Best ( > 6 ) : No indicator



## 2. 5 Start M o tors Metho d s CSC (Combination sticks commands) is used to start motors instead of just pushing the throttle stick. O ne of the
following methods can be used to start/stop motors.

Under the conditions stated below, the motors will stop in ATTI

. Mode /GPS ATTI. M ode : (1) The throttle sticks is under 10% for more than 3secs after motors start.
(2) The t hrottle sticks is under 10% for more than 3secs after landing.
(3) The throttle sticks is under 10% for more than 3secs and the inclined angle of aircraft exceeds

70° 。

I f motors fail to start, please refer to the following list for trouble shooting. (1) T he Controller Unit fails to obtain the firmware version of IMU and GPS, please check the
connection or up grade the IMU and GPS.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 27

(2) T he firmware version of IMU and Controller Unit is mismatched; please upgrade the firmware of

IMU or Controller Unit.
(3) T he firmware version of GPS and Controller Unit is mismatched; please upgrade the firmware of

GPS or Controller Un it. (4) The transmitter calibration has exited abnormally, please recalibrate.
(5) T he transmitter calibration results with big bias, please recalibrate. (6) T he transmitter calibration results with big mid point bias, please recalibrate. (7) Incorrect channel mappings
, please make sure the basic channels A/E/T/R/U are mapped
correctly

. (8) I nvalid SN or SN error; please contact your dealer or DJI custom service.
(9) T he Controller Unit is locked, please unlock the Controller Unit and reconfigure all the parameters

in the Assista nt software. (10) IMU disconnected, please check the connection. (11) C ompass data abnormal, please eliminate magnetic interference and recalibrate the compass. (12) W hen F light limit function is enabled, if the aircraft fly out of the max

- radius in ATTI. mode and the

m otors are stalling, the motors will fail to spool up in GPS ATTI. mode cause the Flight limit

function works. (13) T he attitude status is bad and the LED indicator blinks white, the motors will fail to spool up.
(14) T he Transmitter disconnected, the motors will fa il to spool up. (15) The A2 flight control system is connecting and communicating with the Assistant software, the
motors will fail to spool up.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 28 

## 2. 6 Basic Flying T est Carry out the following procedures to complete the basic flight test. 

### 1. Wait the GPS s ignal to be well LED

Pl ace the aircraft away from you and others at least 3 met ers and wait the ≥6 ( about 30 seconds)

. or no Red LED



### 2

. Start motors and takeoff aircraft

. LED
Execute CSC to start motors; all sticks back to midpoint as soon as motors start, then push

the throttle stick to take off the aircraft, meanwhile the home point is record ed

. NOTE:

3 6 secs after power on; 10secs after ≥ 6; Motors have been started, auto

- record the position as home point at the first time the throttle stick is raised 

### ( ∝ 

### )

After the home point is recorded successfully and the distance from aircraft is less than 8m,

LED indicator will blink 6 violet conti nually. Note : only when GPS signal is good (no Red LED) LED indicator will blink 6 violet continually

. 

### ( 6 

### )

3. Operate sticks to control the flying attitude of the aircraft during fl ight

Transmitter (Mode2) Aircraft Operations

Throttle

Stick Push Throttle sticks to control the aircraft
to elevate and descend. The aircraft can
lock to an altitude when the throttle stick is at midpoint.

Yaw Stick Push the yaw stick to rotate the aircraft in
clockwise or counter clockwise direction.

Roll Stick Push roll stick to control the aircraft left or right
, pitch stick to control forward or
backward. When both roll and pitch sticks are at midpoint : (1) GPS ATTI. M ode : the aircraft will
be stabilized and locked in horizontal position. (2) ATTI

. M ode : the aircr aft will be
stabilized but unlocked in horizontal position. Pitch

Stick©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 29 

### 4.Hover

In GPS ATTI. M ode , the aircraft will hover when the throttle/yaw/roll/pitch sticks are all released at mid

- point.



### 5.Landing

Use the throttle stick to control the landing speed, try to land your aircraft gently to avoid shock or crash.

Please refer to the next section “ P rotection F unctions S etting” to take precautions.
(1) Low voltage alert: yellow quick flashes or red quick flashes

. (2) FailSafe : LED indicator blinks blue

. Moreover , you may come across the following abnormal situation, please carry out the operation below. (3) Compass data is abnormal; the LED blinks yellow and green alternatively. P lease re

- calibrate the Compass.
(4) IMU data is abnormal, the LED blinks fo ur green. P lease contact your dealer.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 30 

# 3 Protection Functions Setting

Set protect ion in the Assistant software

- > Advanced page

. FailSafe and Low voltage protections are required

.



## 3.1 FailSafe

FailSafe works when the Transmitter ( TX) signal is lost, the flight control system will auto matically control the

aircraft to reduce injuries or damage

.

TX
signal D escriptions

Home

Point (HP)

≥

6 Home poin t will be recorded:

- After 30 seconds of strong GPS signal

- 10 seconds later after green LEDs have stopped blinking, when throttle sticks are
moved away from mid point.

FailSafe Customize the failsafe to define what happens if remote control signal is lost. Choose

from either a uto hovering, RTH or "RTH at a preset altitude in the A2 Assi s tant"

One

- Key

Go Home A switch can be set to trigger RTH without signal loss. If One

- Key RTH is enabled

duri ng flight, aircraft control will cease and LED lights will indicate Control Mode. Release the RTH switch to regain control. If the Failsafe has been triggered the

switch will not work.

With One

- Key RTH in progress, aircraft orientation can be controlled wh ile the

aircraft returns.



### FailSafe and Go H ome procedures

(1) The aircraft will not go home (only attitude stabilizing) i n the condition that <6 o r GPS is not working
, even if Transmitter signal is lost or Go Home switch is triggered. (2) It is reco mmended to set the Go Home switch in the Assistant software. U sers are suggested to©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 31 enter FailSafe and go home by using the Go Home switch rather than turning off the Transmitter in emergency situations. (3) M ake sure there are no obstacles during aircraft go home and users are familiar with the methods to regain control.



### H ow to regain con trol in FailSafe

3

- position
Switch Position

- 1 Position

- 2 Position

- 3

GPS ATTI. Mode ATTI

. Mode ATTI

. Mode Manual Mode

R egain control You have to t oggle the control mode switch

once to regain control if the signal recovers

. R egain control as soon as signal recovers

.



## 3.2 Low V oltage P rotection

Low voltage protection is used to alert low battery voltage during flight; in this case, users should promptly fly
back the aircraft and land to avoid unexpected damages.

T o use this function please set in As sistant software

- > Advanced

- > Voltage page to configure two voltage level s

.

P rotection s O ption Selected C onditions LED A ircraft

F irst level LED

---- ( ∝ ) N one

GH & Landing Make sure the home point is recorded and

no obstacles in going home and landing path

. ( ∝ ) Go

- Home & Landing

S econd

level LED

---- ( ∝ ) N one

D escending

---- ( ∝ ) D escending directly



### Go

- Home & Landing Usage Tips
(1) The h ome point recorded is the same in both FailSafe and Low voltage protection. The aircraft will not go

home in the follow ing cases : a) Control mode switch is at the position

- 3 (M anual Mode or ATTI . Mode )
b) GPS signal is bad ( < 6 ) c) The distance between aircraft and the home point is less than 25m, and the height over the Home point less than 20m.


### D escending Usage Tips

The aircraft will not hover when the throttle stick is at the mid point. Push the throttle sti ck to 90% of its
endpoint, the aircraft will still ascend slowly if you continue to pull the throttle stick, and the control of Pitch,

Roll and Yaw are the same as before.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 3 2

(1) Please pay atten tion to the LED alert of low voltage and make sure the power is enough for go

home and landing. I nsufficient power reserve will cause the aircraft to crash as well as other

consequences. (2) I f the second level low voltage alert occurs in below procedures, the aircraft will descend
automatically. a) W hen the aircraft is in Fa ilSafe and Go Home process 。 b) W hen the aircraft is controlled by the Ground Station.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 33 

# 4 Advanced Features

The advanced features of A2 include IOC (intelligent orientation control), gimbal control, parachute activation

and so on. It also enable users to tweak the A2 configuration via the A2 Assistant wirelessly through the

Bluetooth connection.


## 4.1 IOC (Intelligent Orientation Control) function 4.1.1IOC

IOC Help users to set the Flying direction ; Should be enabled in Assistant software.

F lying dir ection T he flying direction of aircraft when pushing the Roll and Pitch sticks.

F orward direction T he flying direction of aircraft when the pitch stick is pushed forward.

N ormal flying IOC is disabled. Forward direction is pointing to the nose directi on and changes

along with the nose. CL(course lock)

mode Its forward direction is pointing to the nose direction when recording, which is

fixed until you re

- record it or exit from CL.

HL (home lock) mode Record a Home Point (HP), push Pitch stick to co ntrol the aircraft far from or

near to the HP.

POI mode Point of Interest . Record a p oint of i nterest ( POI ), the aircraft can circle around

the POI, and the nose always points to the POI.
BTM (Banked Turn)

mode In this mode, the roll and yaw sticks ar e combined to help you perform banked

turns with only one hand.



### Conditions of IOC function

F lying IOC

Setting C ontrol M ode GPS

- C OMPASS

PRO R equired GPS Satellites D istance L imits

Normal

---- ---- ---- B asic to control mode N one
CL Enabled N ot Manual Mode Compass N one N one
HL Enabled GPS ATTI. Mode GPS ≥ 6

POI Enabled GPS ATTI. Mode GPS ≥ 6

BTM Enabled GPS ATTI. Mode GPS ≥ 6 N one



### Step 1 IOC switch set ting

P lease enable the IOC function in Adva nced

- > IOC page of Assistant software. T hen choose a 3

- positon switch on
the Transmitter to set as IOC switch, which is used to select the different IOC modes and manually record the

Forward direction , HP and POI recording

.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 34 There are six types of IOC switch setting. B elow are the three recommended options of IOC switch setting which
may be configured in the Assistant software. Switch positions A B C

1 OFF OFF OFF

2 CL CL CL

3 HL POI BTM



### Step 

## 2 Forward D irection , HP and POI R ecording After you enab le the IOC in assistant software, the flight control system will record the forward direction and home
point automatically after power on
, if the record ing condition s are met

. Y ou can manually re
- record the forward direction, home point and POI during flyi ng. Note that no BTM recording is required. Read the following table for

the record ing method details.

CL HL POI

Recorded

Orientation Aircraft’s nose as forward

direction Home point The position that the user
wish to fly around.

C onditions 3 6 secs after power on 1 0 secs later after ≥ 6 ; M otors have been started

. 1 0 secs later after ≥ 6

.

Auto matically A uto matically record at 3 6

secs after power on A utomatically record at the first

time you push the thrott le stick N o A utomatic record method

Manual A ccording to any option of IOC switch setting, quickly toggle the switch between adjacent

positions 3

- 5 times to record manually

.

Successful (20) ( 20 ) ( 20 )

(1) DO NOT toggle the switch between the position 1 and 3 frequently
, which may re
- recor d the

p osit i on 2.
(2) T he new Home Point and Forward Direction can be set only after one has already been recorded
automatically. (3) HP is not only used in IOC, but also in FailSafe and Low voltage as go home and landing

destination

. T he flight control system will automatically record the HP even if IOC function is

dis abled in Assistant software but Forward direction and POI can be recorded only after IOC is

enabled. (4) O nce the Home Point is recorded successfully, LED will blink (6) continually under the©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 35 following co nditions. All conditions must be true.

1. ≥ 6

. 2. Distance bet ween aircraft and the recorded home point is less than 8m.

3. Current control mode is in GPS ATTI. Mode or ATTI

. Mode of switch position

- 2

.



### S tep 

## 3 CL, HL and POI flying test

P lease study the following diagram then make an I OC flying test. IOC LED indicator b links ( (2) means not all

stick ( s ) at the midpoint )

HP POI F lying direction F orward direction R out e Auxiliary line

F lying IOC

switch R ecord P itch stick control of aircraft R oll stick control of aircraft

N ormal OFF None

CL CL

HL HL

POI POI

DO NOT toggle the IOC switch frequently in HL flying to avoid re

- recording the HP unwittingly.

IOC function is available only when all the required conditions are satisfied. I f any condition is omitted

the flight control system will exit IOC. P lease keep an eye on the LED to know the current control mode

.
(1) I t is r ecommended to start the HL flight when the aircraft is > 10m away from the HP. If start ing

the HL when the distance between aircraft and HP is less than 10m and it ’ s the first time you

st art HL after power on, then the flight control system will only enter HL after flying out of the 10m range.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 36

(2) D uring HL flying if one of the following condition s occur , the flight control system will exit HL and

enter into CL: the aircraft is within of 10m f rom HP; the control mode is changed to ATTI . Mode ; <6( LED 

### ( 2 

### ) or 

### ( 3 

### ) )

.



### Step 4 Banked Turn m o de fl ying test

Banked Turn Mode is useful when you want to perform banked turns one handed. It allows you to pitch and roll to
turn without using the yaw stick. Application examples:

1. Normal and FPV aerial photography in this mode is smooth and simple, giving a different visual feel to your

work.

2. In this mode, the roll and yaw sticks are combined to help you perform banked turns with only one hand.

Setting steps (Mode 2) :
1. To enable Banked Turn Mode , replace the POI gear of the IOC switch with Banked Turn gear.
2. With Banked Turn Mode activated, you can circle the aircraft with just one stick. To do this, Mode 2 (throttle
on the left stick) user s should select the “Use Roll” option while Mode 1 (throttle on the right stick) users

should select the “Use Yaw” option

.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 37 U sin g Banked Turn Mode (Mode 2):

1. Select “ Use Roll ” to disable the yaw stick or select “ Use Yaw ” to disable the roll stick.

2. Push pitch stick to move the aircraft for ward or backward

. 3. After that, Push roll stick left or right to perform banked turn a s the following diagram shown. N o yaw stick
required.

4. When the aircraft is hovering, yaw is controlled by the roll stick instead.

5. Rapidly pull the pitch stick to the mid

- point to stop the aircraft.

F lying IOC

switch R ecord P itch stick Roll stick P itch stick Roll stick P itch stick Roll stick P itch stick Roll stick

BTM BTM No ne

(1) Banked Turn Mode works only with GPS

- ATTI mode (GPS ≥6 ). The aircraft will stop and hover when

less than 6 satellites are found. (2) Onc e the aircraft performs side slip, adjust the drift damping value. Note that too big value may lead

to aircraft vibration.



### 4.1. 2 Cruise Control

Cruise C ontrol allows you to lo ck the speed of the aircraft
, freeing you to control the gimbal while maintai ning
flight. Application examples:

1. By maintaining steady flight, you can focus more on your shots and gimbal control, and your total flight time is
increased by eliminating unnecessary speed changes.

2. Activate Cruise Control to lock your aircraft into its current horizontal speed when you release the control

sticks.

Cruise Control only works when IOC has been enabled. Tick the Cruis e Control box in the A2 Assistant to enable it.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 38 Assign a 3

- gear switch on the remote control for Cruise Control . Follow the steps below to use Cruise Control

. Use the control sticks to accelerate the aircraft to your target speed then toggle the assigned Cruise Control switch

to “ S et ” or “ Continue s ”. The action of three different gears of the cruise speed is defined as follow :


###  Close

Deactivate Cruise Control

. 

###  Set Move the switch to this position in flight to “ S et ” the cruising speed. The speed at the point that the switch is toggled will be maintained. If you use the control sticks to adjust aircraft speed, the aircraft will return to its
original speed once the control sticks return to center.



###  Continue s In this position the aircraft will maintain its speed of flight however if you accelerate or slow down, it will
continue flying at the new speed once the control sticks retur n to center.

(1) Cruise Control only works in GPS

- ATTI mode ( GPS > 6 )

. (2) The aircraft will exit Cruise Control mode and hover at its current altitude when less than 6 GPS

satellites are detected , switches to ATTI. m ode or enters auto go home mode

. To enter “Set ” and

“ Continue ” modes, you must first go into “ OFF ” mode. (3) Cruise Control is disabled during Banked Turn mode flying. (4) M aximum speed is 15m/s under Cruise Control mode.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 39 

## 4.2 Servo Gimbal function

C onnect the servos of your gimbal to the Controller Unit as the fig. below , roll servo connect s to F3 port and
pitch servo connect s to F 2 , and configure in Advanced

- > Gimbal page in the Assistant software. No Receive r

channel is asked to be mapped for the F2 or F3 port if gimbal function is enabled in the Assistant Software. Note: Even you map Receiver channels to F3 and F 2 (Which are shown as D3 and D 2 in the Assistant Software

- > Channel Mapping), the F3 and F 2 will not give output signal s from the mapped Receiver channels.



## 4.3 Flig ht Limits

A ll unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) operators should abide by all regulations from such organizations as the ICAO
(Internationa l Civil Aviation Organization) and their own national airspace regulations. F or safety reasons, the flight

limits functio n is enabled by default to help users use this product safely and legally

. T he flight limits function
includes height, distance limits and safety zone

.

I n Ready to Fly mode
, height, distance lim its and No Fly Zones work together to manage flight. I n Ready to Fly
(non

- GPS) status , only height limit s applies and flights cannot go higher than 120m.

D efault parameters in A ssistant Software are compliant within the definitions of class G ruled by ICAO.
(Refer to Airspace Classification to get more details)

. A s each country has its own rules, make sure to configure these parameters to comp ly with these rules before flying

.



### 4.3.1 Max Height , Radius Limits & Home Fence The Max Height & Radius restri cts the flying height and distance. Configuration can be done in the A2 Assistant

. Once complete, your aircraft will fly in a restricted cylinder.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 40

GPS ATTI mode

Limits Ground Station Tips

Max Height Flight height must b e under the set height. W arning: Height limit reached.

Max Radius F light distance must be within the max radius. W arning: Distance limit reached.

ATTI mode

F light Limits Ground Station Tips
Max Height Flight height restricted to 120m and under. W arning: Height limit reached.

Max Radius No limits

(1) If you fly out of the limit, you can still control the aircraft , but cannot fly it further. (2) If the aircraft flies out of the max radius in ATTI mode
, it will fly back within range automatically

.

H ome fenc e is a safety feature that prevent s the aircraft from coming in too close to an operator

. When enabled,

the aircraft will not be able to enter a safe area defined by the user. Application examples:

1. S upply safe guard for new users in case of damage from wrong operation.

2. Keep users safe when aircraft flies close in a high spee d

. The safety radius can be set in the A2 Assistant as shown below:©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 41

Assign a switch on the remote control to turn the home fence feature on and off. The safety radius range can
be set between 12m and 100m.

(1) Home fence feature works only with GPS

- ATTI mode. NO home fence limit for ATTI mode and navigation mode. (2) Failsafe procedure overrides the home fencing feature.



### 4.3.2 Flight Limits of Special Areas

Restricted areas include airports worldwide. All restricted areas are listed on the DJI official website at http://www.dji.com/fly

- safe/category

- mc . Restricted areas are divided into category A and c ategory B. Category A areas cover major international airport such as LAX and Heathrow, while category B areas includes smaller airports. Category A Safety Zone

 The category A “safety zone” is comprised of a small “no

- fly zone” and a range of “restricted

- altitude zones”. Flight is prevented in the “no

- fly zone” but can continue with height restrictions in the restricted

- altitude zone.

 1.5 miles (2.4 km) around a designated safety zone is a no

- fly zone, inside which takeoff is prevented.

 1.5 miles (2.4 km) to 5 miles (8 km) around restricted areas are altitude restricted, with maximum altitude going
from 35 feet (10.5 m) at 1.5 miles (2.4 km) to 400 feet (120 m) at 5 miles (8 km).

 A “warning zone” has been set around the safety zone. When you fly within 32 0 feet (100m) of the safety zone, a warning message will appear on the DJI Ground Station

.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 42 Category A

Category B Safety Zone

 Category B “safety zone” is comprised of a “no

- fly zone” and a “warning zone”.

 0.6 miles (1 km) arou nd the safety zone is a designated “no

- fly zone”.

 A “warning zone” has been set around the safety zone. When you fly within 0.6 miles (1Km) of this zone, a warning
will appear on the DJI Ground Station

.

Category B

GPS ATTI mode

Zone Restriction R ear L ED Flight Indicator

No

- fly Zone Motors will not start.

I f the aircraft enters the restricted area in ATTI mode but

GPS ATTI mode activates, the aircraft will automatically

descend to land then stop its motors after landing. B link red q uickly and continue

for 3 seconds before normal

blinks.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 43

R estricted

- altitude
flight zone I f the aircraft enters a restricted area in ATTI mode and

GPS ATTI mode activates, it will descend to a safe altitude

and hover 15 feet below the sa fe altitude. B link yellow quickly and

continue for 3 seconds before

normal blinks. Warning zone No flight restriction applies, but there will be warning

message.

Free zone
No restrictions

. N one.

S emi

- automatic descen t : A ll stick commands are available except the throttle stick command during

the d escent and landing process

. M otors will stop automatically after landing

. U sers must toggle the S1
switch to regain control. This is the same as regaining control durin g Failsafe. P lease refer to r egain

c ontrol d uring f ailsafe p rocedure

. (1) When flying in the No

- fly Zone , LED flight indicators will blink red quickly and continue for 3 seconds, then switch to indicate current flying status and continue for 5 seconds at w hich point
it will switch back to red blinking. (2) When flying in the Restricted

- altitude flight zone and Warning zone, LED flight indicators will blink yellow quickly and continue for 3 seconds, then switch to indicate current flying status and

continue for 5 seconds at which point it will switch back to red blinking.
(3) For safety reasons, please do not fly close to airports, highways, railway stations, railway lines, city centers and other special areas. Try to ensure the aircraft is visible.



### 4.3 .3 Conditio ns of Flight Limits In different working modes and flight modes, flight limits will differ according to number of GPS satellites found

. The following table demonstrate s all the cases( √ : available; × :unavailable ). All flights are restricted by height, dista nce and special areas simultaneously

. The Failsafe and Ground Station
operations are not restricted to flight l imits , but if Ground Station function is used, the flight will be restricted the
special area limits built in to Ground Station

. R efer to the Gro und Station manual for details.

C ontrol Mode number of GPS found Limits of Special A rea M ax Height Max Radius

GPS ≥ 6 √ √ √

< 6 × √ ×

ATTI. ≥ 6 √ √ ×©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 44 < 6 × √ ×

Manual ≥ 6 × × ×

Flight Limits can b e disabled in the Assistant as below.

Users cannot take off the aircraft in some Special Areas even the Flight Limits is disabled in the
Assistant

.



## 4. 4 Parachute Function

The A2 now supports the DJI Dropsafe parachute system which can be enabled in the A2 Assistant. The X3 and F4 ports should be connected. There are two methods to deploy the parachute.

1. Motors will automatically stop and the parachute will deploy by using switch on the remote control

. 2. In the event of an emergency (aircraft descends faster than 10 m/s), motors will automatically stop and the
parachute will deploy.

(1) P arachute will deploy once the aircraft descends faster than 10 m/s in manual mode.
(2) Once parachute function enabled, motors will automatically stop and the parachute will deplo y. (3) Refer to DJI D ropsafe user manual for more details.



## 4. 5 Gear function

Once enable the Intelligent Gear function , the gear is default down on the ground or in case of emergency (e.g. motor failure tolerance, auto landing); you can control it to be up or down by a switch when the aircraft altitude©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 45

is above 5m during flight. Please configure in the Advanced

- > Gear page in the Assistant software. C onnect the landing gear of S800 EVO

to the Controller Unit as fig. below.

(1) Make sure to enable and config ure the Intelligent Gear function in the A ssistant software first, and then connect the gear to the F1 port. (2) T he Gear channel is required to be mapped with a channel on Receiver if the Intelligent Gear function is enabled in Assistant Software, and the F1 port will give output s for retracting control. (3) Once you map the Gear channel, F1 port will give output signal s from the controller for retract control. Otherwise, even the Intelligent Gear function is enabled ; F1 will give output from D1 ( it ’ s

necessary to map the D1 channel with a channel on Receiver as your demands)

.



## 4. 6 Attitude Control When One Motor Output Fail s

For Hexa

- rotor, including Hexa

- rotor I, Hexa

- rotor V, Hexa

- rotor IY and Hexa

- rotor Y, the aircraft with A2 f light
control system is attitude controllable when one motor output fails

.
Select Course lock or home lock mode for flying the aircraft into a safe area to land when the aircraft is far away or the attitude can’t be recognized.



## 4. 7 DJI Assistant App Usage

T here is a built

- in Bluetooth in the A2 LED

- BT

- I module . W ith a DJI Assistant App installed o n your mobile
device, remote parameter configuration can be obtained via Bluetooth communication between the A2 Flight Control System and the mobile device

.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 46 

### S upported iOS devices

i P hone 4s, i P hone 5, i P hone 5s, i P od T ouch 5, i P ad 3, i P ad 4, i P ad air, i P ad mini
, iOS6.1 or above is required. B luetooth version is required to be 4.0 or above.



### Required versions of DJI Assistant A pp & Firmware
Require DJI Assist ant App version 1.1.14 or above and the firmware of A2 Controller Unit version 2. 1 or above, as

well as the firmware of LED

- BT

- I module version 2.0 or above.



### Specifications

B luetooth version 4.0 E nvironment temperature

- 1 0 °C ~+50 °C
C ommunication distance 50m Consumption 240mw(0.04A@6V)



### DJI Assistant App Usage
Step 1 Download and installation

1. S earch the DJI Assistant in App store on mobile device and install it.

Step 2 Connect the A2 Controller Unit and the DJI Assistant App

1. Prepare an iOS device supported 4.0 B luetooth, and then enable the Bluetooth function on the mobile

device.

2. Power on the transmitter and the A2 Flight Control System, make sure the Bluetooth S tatus Indicator is

solid Red

. 3. Run the DJI Assistant App. You may be asked to register through internet when first login (the account of PC Assistant software is OK for login) ; follow the tips to set Main Controller name and password.

4. Observe the indicators on the left bottom of the software. ( connection indi cator and communication indicator) On the DJI Assistant App , if the communication indicator is , please double
check the connections and driver installation; otherwise if the indicator is blinking , go to next step.
5. Select the “Basic” option. Please follo w step

- by

- step for your first

- time

- configuration. Basic configuration
is necessary. Click the icon to get the configuration details.
6. You can click the “Advanced” option for more parameter settings. Advanced setting is optional. There are
Motor, F/S

, IOC
, Gimbal, V oltage, Limits, Gear, etc.

7. C heck all parameters in the View page

. 8. Select “More” to obtain more details. Including: Restore MC default s ettings, A ccount s , Main Controller
List, Information, wiki, Rate DJI Assistant, FAQ, Feedback, About

.

1. Make sure to upgrade the LED

- BT

- I module to the latest firmware via the PC Assistant software on a PC before you use the DJI Assistant App with the A2 Flight Control System.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 47

2. Every time you run the DJI Assistant App, the App will search the Controller Unit autom atically

. 3. The gain value displayed on Mobile Device and PC may be a little different, that is OK for use.

Step 3 Flying Test Procedures

1. Get the aircraft ready, run the DJI Assistant and make sure it is connected with the main controller. (The

indicators on the DJI Assistant are )

2. Start the motors.

3. The “View” page shows the relative parameters real

- time when flying.

4. Go to the “Basic” and click into the “Gain” page to set the values of all gains real

- time during flying.

5. Go to the “ Basic ” and click into t he “ Tool ” page to view the values of IMU & Compass real

- time during
flying.

6. Finish the flying and land your aircraft.

Only the parameter referred above can be changed during flying. Others can be configure d after
landing.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 48 

# Appendix
L ED indicator descriptions

Control mode GPS signal

Manual Mode: No indicator Best ( > 6 ) : No indicat or ATTI . Mode : ( 1 ) ( sticks not in mid

- point (2) ) Good ( = 6 ) : (1)
GPS ATTI. Mode : (1) (sticks not in mid

- point (2)) Bad ( = 5 ) : (2)
Ground Station: (1) Worst ( < 5 ) : (3) 

### Flight Attitude Attitude good : No indicator Attitude status bad: (3)
IMU data lost, calibrat e IMU needed : ( 4) 

### Compass calibration
H orizontal calibration ( ∝ ) Calibration Failed ( ∝ )

Vertical calibration ( ∝ ) Abnormal Compass Data ( ∝ ) 

## Low voltage alert

First level alert ( ∝ ) Second level alert ( ∝ )


## FailSafe mode During the Fai lSafe ( ∝ ) C ompass Abnormal after power on ( ∝ )


## E rrors
S ystem Error (4) C ompass Abnormal after power on ( ∝ ) 

## IOC Recording

Record home

- point successfully (20) Aircraft is in the 8m range of HP (6)

Record forward direction s uccessfully ( 20)

Record a Point Of Interest success fully ( 20)


## Bluetooth

A2 Assistant is connected / dis connected to the flight control system ( ∝ )

When the LED blinks (3) , please hover or land the aircraft and wait for the white LED to go off

. When the LED blinks ( 3), it is not recommended to fly.

When the LED blinks ( 4), please contact your dealer.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 49 

## Specifications
General

Built

- In Functions 

###  Built

- in Receiver



###  Multiple C ontrol Modes


###  2

- axle Gimbal Support ed


###  Enh anced FailSafe


###  Intelligent Orientation Control


###  D ynamical S ystems Protection


###  PC & Bluetooth Ground Station 

###  E xternal Receiver Supported


###  9 Types of Supported Multi

- rotor 

###  Other DJI Products Support ed


###  Low Voltage Protection


###  4 C onfigurable Outputs


###  Sound Alarm


###  Co nfigure Parameters Via Bluetooth 

## Peripheral Supported Multi

- rotor  Quad

- rotor: I4, X4

 Hexa

- rotor: I6, V6, Y6, I Y6

 Octo

- rotor: X8, I8, V8 Supported ESC output 400Hz refresh frequency. Supported Transmitter for Built

- in Receiver Futaba FA SST (MULT, MLT2, 7CH) Series and DJI DESST Series
E xternal Receiver Supported Futaba S

- Bus, DSM2 , PPM Recommended Battery 2S ~ 6S LiPo
Other DJI Products Support ed Z15
, iOSD Mark II
, D

- BUS Adapter , S1000,S900 EVO, 2.4G
Data Link , H3

- 2D
, H3

- 3D , DJI Dropsafe Parachute 

## Electrical & Mechanical Power Consumption MAX 5W ( Typical Value: 0.3A@12.5V ) Operating Temperature

- 5°C to +60°C Total Weight <= 224 g (overall)
Dimensions  MC: 54mm x 39mm x 14.9mm

 IMU: 41.3mm x 30.5mm x 26.3mm

 GPS

- C OMPASS PRO : 62 mm (diameter) x 14.3 mm
 PMU: 39.5mm × 27.6mm × 9.8mm

 LED

- BTU

- I : 30mm x 30mm x 7.9mm 

## Flight Performance (can be effected by mechanical performance and payloads) Hovering Accuracy ( In GPS ATTI. Mode)  Vertical: ± 0.5m

 Horizontal: ± 1.5 m Maxi mum Wind Resistance <8m/s (17.9mph / 28.8km/h) Max Yaw Angular Velocity 150deg/s Max Tilt Angle 35° Ascent / Descent 6m/s©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 50 

# FAQ
U se with other DJI products

The A2 can be used with other DJI products such as iOSD Mark II
, Z15 series gimbals
, S800 EVO and 2.4G

Data Link (iPAD Ground Station function) , H3

- 2D, H3

- 3 D
, etc. U sers should connect them to the correct

CAN

- Bus port.

CAN1: iOSD Mark II , Z15 series

. CAN2: 2.4G Data Link (iPAD Ground Station function), H3

- 2D , H3

- 3 D

. The following 2.4G D ata L ink connection diagram is the connection for your reference

.©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 51 The following H3

- 2D connection diagram is the connection for your reference

.

(1) H3

- 2D /3D users should upgrad e the firmware to the latest version (GCU V1.6& IMU V1. 6 or above).
(2) If the 2.4G Data Link and H3

- 2D /3D are used at the same time, a CAN

- HUB module is required.

When using the A2 flight control system firmware version V 2.1 , the firmware of other DJI products used in
conjunction must be matched with the requirements in the table below.

Other DJI Products F irmware/Software Version (or above) Assistant Software( use to upgrade)

iOSD Mark II V3.0 iOSD V4.0 & OSD Viewer V4.0

Zenmuse H3

- 2D /3 D GCU V1.6 & IMU V1.6 & CMU1.0 H3

- 2D V1.02

Z15

- GH3 GCU V0.12 & IMU V1.4 Z15

- GH3 V1.00

Z15

- 5D GCU V0.12 & IMU V1.4 Z15

- 5D V1.00

Z15

- 5N/7N/GH2/5R GCU V0.0.12 & IMU V1.0.18_beta Z15 V1.4

2.4G Bluetooth

Datalink T he Ground end V 1.0.1.5 & The Air End

V 1.0.1 .1 & BTU V1.0.1.2 2.4G Bluetooth Datalink V1.0.0.6

iPAD Ground Station V1.3.56

----©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 52 

## Channel Mapping Instruction s for PC Assistant Software

Basic Channel Default Settings Usage Description s
A Roll Control of the Controller Unit , mapp ed

to the Channel 1 of Receiver During Assistant Software usage, please click

the “ Calibration ” button, to calibrate the

Transmitter sticks travel. During calibrating,
make sure to operate strictly following the
prompts; otherwise may lead to calibration

failure.

Click the “ Map ” button , then you can re
- do
mapping for A/E/T/R/U

. E Pitch Control of the Controller Unit
,

mapped to the Channel2 of Receiver

T Throttle Control of the Controller Unit
,

mapped to the Channel3 of Receiver

R Yaw Control of the Controller Unit
, m apped

to the Channel4 of Receiver

U Control Mode Switch of the Controller Unit
,

mapped to the Channel7 of Receiver

Others Default Settings Usage Descriptions

K1~K6 Remote Gains Adjustment of the Controller

Unit , unmapped. Click “ Unmapped ” button to ma p K1~K6 to the

channels of Receiver.

Pitch Gimbal Pitch Control of the Controller Unit
,

unmapped. Click “ Unmapped ” button to map Pitch to a

Receiver channel f or the gimbal servo control.

D1~D4 Direct Channels (The corresponding ports

are F1~F4 on the Co ntroller Unit ) of Click “ Unmapped ” button to map D1~D4 to

the Receiver channels. If you enable the©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 53 Controller Unit , unmapped. Gimbal functions in Assistant Software, then
the F3/F2 are used for gimbal contro l; e ven D3/D2 are mapped to channels of Receiver,

and the signals from the mapped Receiver
channels will be ignored.

You can use F 4 for switch ing the video

channel of iOSD Mark II , then map D4 to a

Receiver channel.

IOC IOC function of the Controller Unit
,

unmapped. Click “ Unmapped ” button to map IOC to a
Receiver channel. It is recommended to use a

3

- position switch channel.

Go Home One

- Key Go Home function of the

Controller Unit , unmapped. Click “ Unmapped ” button to map Go Home to

the Receiver channel. It is recommended to

use a 2

- position switch chan nel.

Gear Intelligent Gear function of the Controller

Unit , unmapped. If you enable the Gear function in Assistant
Software, then the F1 is used for the gear

contro l of S800 EVO landing.

H3

- 2D /3D H3

- 2D /3D function of the Controller Unit,

unmapped. Click “ Unmapped ” button to map H3

- 2D /3D

to a Receiver channel. It is recommended to use a Knob switch channel, which is only used

for H3

- 2D /3D pitch control.

H

- F ence( Home

Fence ) Unmapped Click “ Unmapped ” button to map Home

Fence on to the Receiver channel. It is

recommended to use a 2

- position switch

channel.
CC ( Cruise

Control ) Unmapped Click “ Unmapped ” button to map Cruise

Control to the Receiver channel. It is

recommended to use a 3

- position switch

channel.

The Pitch and the H3

- 2D /3D channels can be used at the same time. The Pitch is for the pitch
control of servo gimbal, and the H3

- 2D /3D is for the pitch control of H3

- 2D /3D gimbal©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 54 

## Recommended Mapping for Futaba Transmitter (Mode 2) User

Controller Unit Channel Receiver Channel Recommended Transmitt er Switch

A Channe 1 (AIL) Joystick J1

E Channe 2 (ELE) Joystick J2

T Channe 3 (THR) Joystick J3

R Channe 4 (RUD) Joystick J4

U Channe 7 (AUX 5 ) 3

- Position switch
, e.g. SG

K1~K6 Channe 5 ( GEAR ) Knob switch
, e.g. LD
, RD

Pitch Channe 6 ( Vpp ) Knob swi tch
, e.g. LD
, RD

D1 / D 3/ D2

---- ----
D4 Channe 9 (AUX1) 2

- Position switch
, e.g. SF

IOC Channe 10 (AUX 2 ) 3

- Position switch
, e.g. SG

Go Home Channe 11 (AUX 3 ) 2

- Position switch with spring back function, e.g. SH

Gear Channe 8 (AUX4) 2

- Position switch
, e. g. SF

H3

- 2D Channe 12 ( AUX5 ) Knob switch, e.g. LD
、 RD



## Settings of gain values for Your Reference To set the value of basic gain and attitude gain you can refer to the following diagram . T hese values are only for
reference and may vary in practice.



## The Transmitter setup of FUTABA

P lease configure the Frequency item on your Transmitter adhere to the table below . (The names of FASST modes here are based to the Transmitter FUTABA T8FG, please ensure to select the most similar m ode as the names differs for different Transmitters) A ircr aft Configuration Information Basic Attitude

Motor ESC Propeller Battery Weight Pitch Roll Yaw Pitch Roll Vertical

F450 DJI

- 2212 DJI

- 30A DJI

- 8 Inch 3S

- 2200 890 g 150 150 135 150 150 140

F550 DJI

- 2212 DJI

- 30A DJI

- 8 Inch 4S

- 3300 1530 g 170 170 150 160 160 150

S800 EVO / Z15 DJI

- 4114 DJI

- 40A DJI

- 15 Inch 6S

- 15000 7000g 140 140 130 140 140 130

S1000 / 5D gimbal/

5D camera DJI

- 4114 DJI

- 40A DJI

- 15 Inch 6S

- 15000 9200g 120 120 120 170 170 120

S1000 / 5D gimbal/

5D camera DJI

- 4114 DJI

- 40A DJI

- 15 Inch 6S

- 15000 9 3 00g 1 20 120 120 170 170 120©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 55 Transmitter type AREA FASST

FUTABA 18MZ Default FASST

- MULTI \ FASST

- 7CH

FUTABA 14MZ with TM

- 14 Default MULT \ 7CH

FUTABA 14SG FRANCE \ GENERAL FASST

- MULTI \ FASST

- 7CH

FUTABA 12Z 2.4G FASST with TM

- 14 Defaul t MULT \ 7CH

FUTABA 12FG 2.4G FASST with TM

- 14 Default MULT \ 7CH

FUTABA 10CG or 10C with TM

- 10 Default 7CH

FUTABA 9C SUPER with TM

- 7 or TM

- 8 Default 7CH

FUTABA 8FG SUPER FRANCE \ GENERAL MLT2 \ MULT \ 7CH

FUTABA 8FG FRANCE \ GENERAL MULT/7CH

FUTABA 7C 2.4G Defa ult Default

FUTABA 6EX FASST Default Default©201 3

- 2014 DJI . All Rights Reserved. 56 

# Disclaimer Please read this discl aimer carefully before using th is product. By using this product, you hereby agree to this disclaimer and signify that you have read it fully.
THIS PRODUCT IS NOT SUITABLE F OR PEOPLE UNDER THE AGE OF 18. A2 flight controller is designed for experience multi

- rotor enthusiasts providing excellent self

- leveling and altitude holding, which completely takes the stress out of flying RC multi

- rotors for both professional and hobby a pplications. Despite the product having a built

- in flight control system and our efforts in making the operation of the controller as safe as possible when the main power battery is connected, we strongly recommend users to remove all propellers when calib rating and setting parameters. Make sure all connections are good, and keep children and animals away during firmware upgrade, system calibration and parameter setup. DJI Innovations accepts no liability for damage(s) or injuries incurred directly or indir ectly from the use of this product in the following conditions: 1. Damage(s) or injuries incurred when users are drunk, taking drugs, drug anesthesia, dizziness, fatigue, nausea and any other conditions no matter physically or mentally that could impair your ability. 2. Damage(s) or injuries caused by subjective intentional operations.
3. Any mental damage compensation caused by accident.
4. Failure to follow the guidance of the manual to assemble or operate.
5. Malfunctions caused by refit or replacement with non

- DJI acc essories and parts. 6. Damage(s) or injuries caused by using third party products or fake DJI products.
7. Damage(s) or injuries caused by mis

- operation or subjective mis

- judgment. 8. Damage(s) or injuries caused by mechanical failures due to erosion, aging.
9. Damage (s) or injuries caused by continued flying after low voltage protection alarm is triggered.
10. Damage(s) or injuries caused by knowingly flying the aircraft in abnormal condition (such as water, oil, soil, sand and other unknown material ingress into the airc raft or the assembly is not completed, the main components have obvious faults, obvious defect or missing accessories).
11. Damage(s) or injuries caused by flying in the following situations such as the aircraft in magnetic interference area, radio interferenc e area, government regulated no

- fly zones or the pilot is in backlight, blocked, fuzzy sight, and poor eyesight is not suitable for operating and other conditions not suitable for operating. 12. Damage(s) or injuries caused by using in bad weather, such as a r ainy day or windy (more than moderate breeze), snow, hail, lightning, tornadoes, hurricanes etc.
13. Damage(s) or injuries caused when the aircraft is in the following situations: collision, fire, explosion, floods, tsunamis, subsidence, ice trapped, avalanche , debris flow, landslide, earthquake, etc. 14. Damage(s) or injuries caused by infringement such as any data, audio or video material recorded by the use of
aircraft.
15. Damage(s) or injuries caused by the misuse of the battery, protection circuit, RC model and b attery chargers. 16. Other losses that are not covered by the scope of DJI Innovations liability.


# T rademark

DJI and A2 are registered trademarks of DJI. Names of product, brand, etc., appearing in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owner companies. This product and manual are copyrighted by DJI with all rights reserved. No part of this product or manual shall be reproduced in any form without the prior written consent or authorization of DJI. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the product or
information contained herein.

# E XHIB I T 

# 3 (F iled as Confidential )

# E XHIB I T 

# 4 (F iled as Confidential )

# E XHIB I T 

# 5 (F iled as Confidential )

# E XHIB I T 

# 6 (F iled as Confidential )